【#范文大全# #英语的步骤教案#】在给学生上课之前老师早早准备好教案课件，因此老师最好能认真写好每个教案课件。 学生反应可以帮助教师更好地把握教学重点和难点，要写好教案课件有没有好的范文可借鉴呢？这篇网络文章让我们对“英语的步骤教案”有了更深刻的理解，我们的建议仅供参考具体操作建议您查阅相关资料或请教专业人士！
英语的步骤教案 篇1
为了加强和规范教学管理，保证和维护正常的教学秩序，确保教学质量稳步提高，大学英语教研室根据教务处及基础部的部署，于_年3月5日前对教研室教师的教案进行检查。本学期我们教研室共有25名教师担任08、09级各系、各专业的公共英语教学任务。现将本次检查工作的有关内容报告如下：
1. 备课量全部达到学校的要求，备课储备量均达到2周，部分教师备课量达到六周。各位教师能够按照学校和基础部的要求，在寒假期间，认真备课，并形成教案和讲稿。承担着08级教学任务的教师，对老教案和讲稿进行了整理和规范，并制定了相应的教学计划。
2. 同头课集体备课，教案和讲稿为新内容。在上学期期末和本学期开学之初，本教研室组织几次同头课集体备课，对课时安排，难重点等各项内容达成了统一认识。
3. 备课分为教案和讲稿，格式规范，书写认真。教研室的大部分教师，特别是青年教师，在备课上投入大量精力。年轻教师的教案不仅语言知识充分详细，他们更利用网络等现代化教育技术，下载了大量的语言文化背景知识，极大地丰富了教学内容。教案中既体现了教学目的、教学手段、教学方法，又包含了板书、语言等教学艺术，形式设计新颖，重点突出，层次分明。
4. 大部分教师准备了电子教案。许多教师特别是年轻教师都精心制作了电子课件。设计新颖，色彩丰富，趣味性强，将所学知识与政治、学生关心的热点有机地结合起来，有些教师在课件中穿插了与课文内容相关的视频，极大地丰富了授课内容，也在一定程度上提高了学生的学习积极性。
5. 讲稿部分内容丰富，资料翔实并富有创新性。从教案的内容可以看出大多数教师在备课上所倾注的努力。一些教师，在教案的内容和安排上有创新，使之更适应所教学生的层次和专业。
6. 个别教师有待提高。虽然大多数教师都能以认真的态度准备教案和讲稿，但仍有个别教师没有按照统一要求填写教案，教研室主任已经作出了督促。在检查备课情况方面，教研室还应加大力度，严格要求。
小学英语教案步骤篇2
从学生学习英语的方式来看,在课堂上学习是主要渠道.上课的主要任务是在老师指导下,去继承人类的知识财富,并在这个过程中去发展自己的认识能力.在课堂上如何做到有效教学，要做到以下几点:
首先,做好课前准备.大致分为三个方面:知识上的准备,这主要通过预习来完成;物质上的准备,就是准备好课堂所需要的一切学习用具;身体上的准备,要求每个学生要科学地生活,要保证基本的睡眠、营养和锻炼.
其次,要开动脑筋积极思考.要认真抓住两个环节:一是专心听讲,不要"走神".要做到这一点,首先要有正确的学习动机,有强烈的学习渴望,才能专心听讲;其次,要充分认识到老师的重大作用,才能虚心去听.二是要努力克服"走神"现象."走神"破坏了上课听讲的连续性,是很多学生学不好的重要原因.
再次,要重理解.上课时,要努力争取当堂理解所学的新知识,要通过提高课堂的学习效率来减轻课外的学习负担,这是一条重要的学习经验.目前重视"出活题,考能力."
最后,要学会科学地思考问题.主要指学生向老师学习知识的过程中,要把老师思考问题时采用的思维方式、思维规律和思维方法学到手.一些优秀的学生,他们上课时,已经从单纯理解具体知识上升到学习科学思维的高度.
课堂上学习虽然是主要渠道,但不是唯一渠道,从英语教学来看,任何老师无论采用何种方式和方法,在整个教学中都是围绕三个方面开展工作的:一是培养兴趣,二是激发学生的求知欲,三是培养自学能力.
一、培养学生兴趣
小学英语教学刚刚起步,要想搞好英语教学,我认为提高学生英语学习的兴趣是关键.对于刚刚起步的小学生,如何帮助学生树立信心,引发其学习兴趣呢?
1.关注学生的学习
小学生开始学习英语,一开始都充满了好奇心,加之入门阶段的学习知识难度不是很大,学习很容易接受.此时,作为老师要抓住这一契机,渲染你自己对英语教学的积极态度,不断鼓励你的学生,从而坚定他们进一步学习英语的信心和决心.时常问问学生的学习情况,以表明你对英语学习也充满了好奇,表明你对英语学习是那么的关注,鞭策学生不断地汲取新的语言知识.
2.为学生提供展示的空间
初学英语的学生大多在掌握新的语言工具过程中,有一种强烈的表现欲望.课堂上,老师采用不同的方式,尽其所能,为学生提供展示的空间;课余,同样要为学生提供其展示语言才1
能的舞台.可以让学生给老师说一些英语单词或一些简单的日常用语.以此来满足学生的表现欲,巩固在课堂上所学的知识,达到师生间共融、共同维持英语学习的兴趣的目的.
二、为学生营造一些语言环境
由于汉语与英语属于不同的语系,中国学生学习英语的最大障碍是缺少语言环境.为了让你的学生能运用多种感官学习英语,提高学习语言的效率,促使其听、说、读、写全面发展,减少语言学习中的枯燥乏味,必须要求学生家长为自己的孩子营造一个良好的语言环境.
1.给学生提供必备的设备和材料
学习英语要准备收录机、学习机以及各种听力磁带,使他们课后有练习英语的机会.条件好的家庭还可以购置VCD机,为他们提供更优越的条件.另外还要买必备的工具书,如词典、语法书等,为他们自主学习打开方便之门.
2.听、读、背英语内容
小学英语的教材内容趣味性强,贴近学生的生活,因而实践性和交际性较强.不听、不读、不背是不行的,我们可以根据这一特点,展开对学生的检查和帮助.帮助他们熟读背诵最基本的句子和关键词语,使他们琅琅上口,然后再让他们进行书写,做到既上口又上手.
三、帮助学生养成良好的学习习惯
良好习惯的培养非一日之功,它不仅是对学生的考验,也是对老师的考验.老师的一言一行无不影响着学生.老师要细致、持之以恒地督促学生培养良好的学习习惯,具体做法如下:
1.每天大声朗读或听读20分钟左右.
2.有意识地识记单词、句型、文章,积累知识.
3.大胆发言,敢于质疑.
4.认真完成作业并及时订正错误.
5.专注地倾听同学的发言、老师的讲课.
6.每单元结束后,整理所学的知识,自撰单元小结.
7.课前预习,课后复习.
8.将遇到的难题记入自己的"难题集锦"中.
培养学生的学习习惯,有效教学是学生学习成绩稳步上升的关键因素,同时也是稳固学生学习兴趣的必要条件
小学英语教案步骤篇3
教学目标：
知识与能力：
1、能听懂、会说“How tall are you? I’m 1.65meters. I’m taller than this one. Howtall is it?”
并能在情景中正确运用。
2、能够知道meter的意思
能够独立完成let’s try的练习
过程与方法：
学生能在合作交流中使用新语言进行沟通
情感与价值观：
培养学生良好的英语学习习惯。
了解基本的计量单位的运用
教学重点：
掌握句型：How tall are you? I’m 1.65meters. I’m taller than this one. How tallis it?”
教学难点：
能在情景中正确运用所学句型并能完成调查表。
教具学具课件准备
录音机及磁带、图片、学生自备一张调查表第几课时：2
探索流程个性添加(教学反思)
1. preparation(预习)
1.日常口语练习。
2.复习单词：taller、 longer、 older、 younger 、shorter
2. presentation(新课呈现)
(1)Let’s try
教师播放录音，学生独立完成练习并核对答案
(2)Let’s talk
a.生阅读对话，并解释大意
b.教师范读，学生跟读
c.分组读，个别读回答问题
d.播放录音，学到再次跟读
3.practice(练习)
(1).T: How tall are you? I’m 1.65metres.引导学生回答，并多加练习。
(2).做完后教师出示图片问How tall are you?请学生轮流回答。
(3).把图片出示给学生，让他们加强练习。同桌或小组之间互相练习。
(4).学生两人分角色朗读课文对话。
4.homework(家庭拓展)
(1).做本单元A Let’s talk部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)听A Let’s talk部分的录音读给同伴、朋友或家长听。
板书设计作业布置
Unit 1 How tall are you? 2
How tall are you?
I’m 164cm tall.
You’re shorter than me.
You’re 4cm taller than me. 1听A Let’s talk部分的录音读给同伴、朋友或家长听。
2每个学生准备图片两张，会用学过的比较级单词和相关句型进行演练。(学生可以根据各自的情况以个人或小组的形式来练习。
小学英语教案步骤篇4
一、教材分析
Module 8 Book 5 的主题是“School”，“ Unit 1 What time does school start?”的语言功能是描述学校生活;学习任务为“What time does school start? What time do you get up?”
二、学情分析
本课的教学对象是五年级学生，他们已经掌握了一定的英语词汇，具有一定的英语学习的积极性与主动性，具备了一定的英语语言运用能力，求知欲增强。因此，在新知识传授的同时，教师要尽可能多的为学生创造良好的语言环境，给学生充足的语言“习得”机会，让学生在学习中积极参与、大胆发言，从而形成积极的情感态度和自主学习的能力。
三、教学目标
(一)知识目标
1、能听懂、会说并认读下列单词：exercise, before, playground, skip, coffee, tea.
2、能听懂、会说并认读下列句子：What time does school start? My school starts at 9 o’clock. What time do you get up? I get up at half past seven.
(二)能力目标
能口头运用“What time does school start?”这类语句询问发生的时间，并能口头运用“My school starts at 9 o’clock.”这类语句回答。
(三)情感目标
为学生创设轻松、愉悦、和谐的英语课堂学习氛围，使学生在学习中敢于开口说英语，并了解西方小学学校日常生活习惯，从而对英语学习产生更为浓厚的兴趣。
四、教学要点分析
(一)教学重点
1、单词：exercise, before, playground, skip, coffee, tea 的认读。
2、运用“What time … ?”来询问事情发生的时间。
(二)教学难点
能够在真实的语境中正确运用“What time … ?”询问事情发生的时间。
五、教学准备
多媒体课件、录音机、磁带、单词卡片、跳绳。
六、教学过程
Step 1 Warming-up
1. Chant:《I like coffee, I like tea.》(第二册中M3 U2 4)
教师一手拿coffee 一手拿tea的英语单词卡片示意学生一起拍手说Chant，并教授单词：coffee, tea。(教授单词时尽量提供一些学过的词汇，鼓励学生自己读出来，培养学生的拼读能力。)
Step 2 Presentation
1. Leading-in.
(1)课件出示学校的图片介绍说：This is our school. Do you read a book in your classroom?
(2)课件出示学校学生跳绳和做操的照片
T: What are they doing? They are skipping. Do you skip in the playground?
They are doing morning exercises.
(3)课件出示学校作息时间表引出句型：What time does our
school start? 及回答：My school starts at eight o’clock.
T：We know the school life in China, how about the children in England? Today，let’s go and visit their school with Amy.
【设计意图】出示自己学校的照片，学生感觉熟悉，同时渗透playground，skipping，exercise的单词的教学，为下边的教学活动做好相关铺垫。通过介绍自己的学校引出Amy的学校生活是什么样的?与我们的学校有什么不同?
2. Text.
(1)Listen to the tape.
T: Our school starts at 8:00. What time does Amy’s school
start? Do you know? Let’s listen to the tape and answer the question:
What time does Amy’s school start?
【设计意图】由学校生活自然要谈到几点上课的问题，学生对此问题的提出不会感到唐突。由教师对Our school starts at 8:00.的讲解，孩子们也一定急于知道英国学生的上课时间，从而初步感知课文内容，了解课文大意。
(2)Listen to the tape again.
T: I get up at 5:30. What time do you get up?
T: You get up at … And you go to school by schoolbus or walk to school and so on. How about Amy? Let’s listen again and answer the following questions:
① What time does Amy go to school?
② How does Amy go to school?
A. She walks to school. B. She goes to school by schoolbus.
【设计意图】由于中西方孩子上学时间的不同，学生起床时间的早晚必然不同。通过对问题的回答，让学生对中西方学校生活的差异有更深的了解。
(3)Look and say.
课件出示get up/watch TV/go to bed/have English/read a book/go to school的图片让学生进行交流。
A: What time do you get up?
B: I get up at
询问小伙伴的起床时间、上学时间等。
小学英语教案步骤篇5
认识目标：
1、掌握并运用新单词basketball ， football. Table tennis.
2、理解句型I like…及I don’t like….
情感目标：
1 、要求学生能运用真实情感表达自己喜欢和不喜欢的事物.
2、设立语言氛围，鼓励孩子进行团队讨论.
能力目标：
1、要求学生能运用所学知识谈论简单的运动项目.
2、掌握正确的语音语调.
教学重难点：
1、句型I like ….和I don’t like ….的运用.单词basketball ， morning exercises 的发音.
材料准备： 图片 实物 表情卡片
教学内容：
Language ： I like …. I don’t like….
Vocabulary： football、basketball、table tennis
教学过程：
一、Warm up ：
Morning exercises (预备环节 活跃气氛 复习单词 exercises)
Clap your hands ， tap your feet ， shake your hand .
二、Vacabulary：
T： On the board draw a ball. “ What’s this ?”
S： It’s a ball. (本环节是共同的基础，引出新课)
Then show the picture of football.
Practice： read after the teacher. (分男女生进行比赛练习，单词练习)
三、Game： This is football.
(击鼓传球，句子练习，增强趣味性)
老师用投篮的动作引出basketball ， 辅助图片加深印象.
T： What’s this ?
S： This is a basketball.
Line by line ： This is a basketball.
Language ： I like ….
用Do you like basketball ?老师将一个happy face 放在football的图片下，引出 I like football .
同理练习 I like basketball. (跟读，比赛练习巩固)
Game： What did teacher says ? (用实物以加深认识)
Vacabulary ：
用实物呈现table tennis. 待学生熟悉单词后加入句子练习“I like table tennis.”
Teacher play the table tennis ： Look， oh no ， I don’t like table tennis.同时，将sad face放在table tennis 的图片下.
T： Don’t. I don’t like table tennis.
四、Practice：
分别用happy face 和sad face 进行说话练习.(能力练习，加强孩子的语言组织能力)
Extra activities：
(Children all stand up then walk in a circle.)
T： Let’s play basketball / football / table tennis .
S： ( Repeat and do the actions.) (此环节是对下面内容的铺垫)
示范：请1个小朋友.
T ： Let’s play football. Ok?
S： Ok， I like football.
Make a dialogue. (更高一层的要求，培养孩子的综合能力)
S1： Let’s play football . Ok ?
S2： No. I don’t like football.
S1： Let’s play basketball.
S2： Ok. I like basketball.
英语的步骤教案 篇2
认识目标：
1、掌握并运用新单词basketball ， football. Table tennis.
2、理解句型I like…及I don’t like….
情感目标：
1 、要求学生能运用真实情感表达自己喜欢和不喜欢的事物.
2、设立语言氛围，鼓励孩子进行团队讨论.
能力目标：
1、要求学生能运用所学知识谈论简单的运动项目.
2、掌握正确的语音语调.
教学重难点：
1、句型I like ….和I don’t like ….的运用.单词basketball ， morning exercises 的发音.
材料准备： 图片 实物 表情卡片
教学内容：
Language ： I like …. I don’t like….
Vocabulary： football、basketball、table tennis
教学过程：
一、Warm up ：
Morning exercises (预备环节 活跃气氛 复习单词 exercises)
Clap your hands ， tap your feet ， shake your hand .
二、Vacabulary：
T： On the board draw a ball. “ What’s this ?”
S： It’s a ball. (本环节是共同的基础，引出新课)
Then show the picture of football.
Practice： read after the teacher. (分男女生进行比赛练习，单词练习)
三、Game： This is football.
(击鼓传球，句子练习，增强趣味性)
老师用投篮的动作引出basketball ， 辅助图片加深印象.
T： What’s this ?
S： This is a basketball.
Line by line ： This is a basketball.
Language ： I like ….
用Do you like basketball ?老师将一个happy face 放在football的图片下，引出 I like football .
同理练习 I like basketball. (跟读，比赛练习巩固)
Game： What did teacher says ? (用实物以加深认识)
Vacabulary ：
用实物呈现table tennis. 待学生熟悉单词后加入句子练习“I like table tennis.”
Teacher play the table tennis ： Look， oh no ， I don’t like table tennis.同时，将sad face放在table tennis 的图片下.
T： Don’t. I don’t like table tennis.
四、Practice：
分别用happy face 和sad face 进行说话练习.(能力练习，加强孩子的语言组织能力)
Extra activities：
(Children all stand up then walk in a circle.)
T： Let’s play basketball / football / table tennis .
S： ( Repeat and do the actions.) (此环节是对下面内容的铺垫)
示范：请1个小朋友.
T ： Let’s play football. Ok?
S： Ok， I like football.
Make a dialogue. (更高一层的要求，培养孩子的综合能力)
S1： Let’s play football . Ok ?
S2： No. I don’t like football.
S1： Let’s play basketball.
S2： Ok. I like basketball.
英语的步骤教案 篇3
一、教材分析
Module 8 Book 5 的主题是“School”，“ Unit 1 What time does school start?”的语言功能是描述学校生活;学习任务为“What time does school start? What time do you get up?”
二、学情分析
本课的教学对象是五年级学生，他们已经掌握了一定的英语词汇，具有一定的英语学习的积极性与主动性，具备了一定的英语语言运用能力，求知欲增强。因此，在新知识传授的同时，教师要尽可能多的为学生创造良好的语言环境，给学生充足的语言“习得”机会，让学生在学习中积极参与、大胆发言，从而形成积极的情感态度和自主学习的能力。
三、教学目标
(一)知识目标
1、能听懂、会说并认读下列单词：exercise, before, playground, skip, coffee, tea.
2、能听懂、会说并认读下列句子：What time does school start? My school starts at 9 o’clock. What time do you get up? I get up at half past seven.
(二)能力目标
能口头运用“What time does school start?”这类语句询问发生的时间，并能口头运用“My school starts at 9 o’clock.”这类语句回答。
(三)情感目标
为学生创设轻松、愉悦、和谐的英语课堂学习氛围，使学生在学习中敢于开口说英语，并了解西方小学学校日常生活习惯，从而对英语学习产生更为浓厚的兴趣。
四、教学要点分析
(一)教学重点
1、单词：exercise, before, playground, skip, coffee, tea 的认读。
2、运用“What time … ?”来询问事情发生的时间。
(二)教学难点
能够在真实的语境中正确运用“What time … ?”询问事情发生的时间。
五、教学准备
多媒体课件、录音机、磁带、单词卡片、跳绳。
六、教学过程
Step 1 Warming-up
1. Chant:《I like coffee, I like tea.》(第二册中M3 U2 4)
教师一手拿coffee 一手拿tea的英语单词卡片示意学生一起拍手说Chant，并教授单词：coffee, tea。(教授单词时尽量提供一些学过的词汇，鼓励学生自己读出来，培养学生的拼读能力。)
Step 2 Presentation
1. Leading-in.
(1)课件出示学校的图片介绍说：This is our school. Do you read a book in your classroom?
(2)课件出示学校学生跳绳和做操的照片
T: What are they doing? They are skipping. Do you skip in the playground?
They are doing morning exercises.
(3)课件出示学校作息时间表引出句型：What time does our
school start? 及回答：My school starts at eight o’clock.
T：We know the school life in China, how about the children in England? Today，let’s go and visit their school with Amy.
【设计意图】出示自己学校的照片，学生感觉熟悉，同时渗透playground，skipping，exercise的单词的教学，为下边的教学活动做好相关铺垫。通过介绍自己的学校引出Amy的学校生活是什么样的?与我们的学校有什么不同?
2. Text.
(1)Listen to the tape.
T: Our school starts at 8:00. What time does Amy’s school
start? Do you know? Let’s listen to the tape and answer the question:
What time does Amy’s school start?
【设计意图】由学校生活自然要谈到几点上课的问题，学生对此问题的提出不会感到唐突。由教师对Our school starts at 8:00.的讲解，孩子们也一定急于知道英国学生的上课时间，从而初步感知课文内容，了解课文大意。
(2)Listen to the tape again.
T: I get up at 5:30. What time do you get up?
T: You get up at … And you go to school by schoolbus or walk to school and so on. How about Amy? Let’s listen again and answer the following questions:
① What time does Amy go to school?
② How does Amy go to school?
A. She walks to school. B. She goes to school by schoolbus.
【设计意图】由于中西方孩子上学时间的不同，学生起床时间的早晚必然不同。通过对问题的回答，让学生对中西方学校生活的差异有更深的了解。
(3)Look and say.
课件出示get up/watch TV/go to bed/have English/read a book/go to school的图片让学生进行交流。
A: What time do you get up?
B: I get up at
询问小伙伴的起床时间、上学时间等。
其他人在看
英语教案
在日常的生活当中，我会运用到各种各样的范文，掌握范文的撰写对自己会有很大的帮助，范文主要包含哪些内容呢？有请驻留一会，阅读小编为你整理的英语教案，欢迎阅读，希望你能够喜欢并分享！
英语教案 篇1
整个教学过程预设分为“复习热身-新课呈现-巩固操练-扩展练习”四个环节：
I 、Revision ，Warm-up(复习热身):
1、师生闲谈：What’s this in English? It’s a ……
Where are they?They are in the zoo.
2、Sing:《 They are in the zoo》
《 Books and Pencils》
3、Revision:What’s this in English?It;s a pencil/book/……
Where’s the ……?(预计可能会出现的回答：It’s in/on/under…… )
设计意图 ：
闲谈主要有两个目的，一是复习学过的英语，一是舒缓紧张的气氛。动物是学生熟悉和喜爱的，说说有关动物的单词既能激发兴趣，又能激起学生学习英语的自信。预计课一开始学生就会投入课堂学习。
唱一唱学过的歌曲，活跃了气氛，能使学生尽快地融入英语课堂学习的氛围。同时还利用唱英语复习 “ Where are they? They are in the zoo.”的特殊疑问句型。就势再让学生唱一唱歌曲《 Books and Pencils》，复习文具，为新课的导入作铺垫。
II 、Presentetion(新课呈现):
这一环节主要是初步完成Let’s learn的教学。
1、导入：用“Where’s are they ?they’re in the study”引出新单词 “study”。
2、教学studay一词。
(1)读音教学：视听——跟读 ---- 小老师教读 ---- 小组朗读。
(2)判断：Is this a study?(课件依次出现图片和问题，进行判断,。)
3、课件出现其他图片，引出：bedroom 、living room、kitchen 、bathroom等单词，相同方法进行教学。
设计意图：
首先从熟悉的旋律、替换的歌词中引出新单词study，利用多媒体的生动画面，给学生以视觉享受，从而结合语境自然而然的理解了study这一单词的词义。
语音的教学是这一环节的重点，预计学生初学时会出现较明显的语音错误。因此，教师要注意指导学生仔细听音、观察老师的口形，认真模仿、及时结合学生发音进行评价纠误。特别是单词bathroom中th/Θ/的发音，Bedroom的音变现象。还可以请发音正确、响亮的学生担任小老师教读，用开火车读、小组朗读等多种形式操练。
用 “Is this a study?”进行判断，有两个意图，一是渗透一般疑问句的用法，第二是从否定回答中引出下一个新单词的.教学。一般疑问句是本单元教学的主要功能，在此结合语境进行渗透教学，体现知识系统的衔接和整合。
预计“Is this a ……?”一般疑问句，虽是新知的渗透，但学生结合语境能充分理解，并能在老师的引导下用“Yes,it is/No,it isn’t.”进行回答。
III 、Practise(巩固操练):
巩固操练本课时的重点环节。通过这一环节的操练，使大多数学生能完成预设的教学重点，形成一定的英语能力。
1、活动，操练单词：
(1) 听单词，说序号。
(2) 指单词(男女生)竞赛：Go to the living……
(3) 找Mickey：Where’s Mickey?
(4) 分组竞赛：看谁说得快(边欣赏图片边抢答;看单词卡片抢答)。
设计意图：
单词的教与学是基础，但单一的模仿无疑是很枯燥的。“知之者不如好之者，好之者不如乐之者。”小学生活泼好动，对游戏、活动有着天性的喜爱。变换几种活动形式，由易到难，既能极大的激发学生的学习兴趣，激发团队精神，又能促进和巩固单词的记忆。
在本节课中我设计了“听单词，说序号”，“指单词”，“找Mickey”， “分组竞赛：看谁说得快”、 “看动作猜单词”等形式的活动。该活动有明确的目的：从听为主的训练过渡到以说为主，让学生复习巩固刚学的五个新单词，实现图像信息和语言信息的相互转换。
“理解先于开口”我们的实际教学中都有这样的经验，对于新学的单词，大多数学生能很快地听懂，却不能很快地说出来或读出来。通过听做的环节，让学生再多几次语言输入的经历，为“说”奠定基础，后面的说就能自然而然得出来了。而且由于后来活动带有比赛的性质，参加游戏的人都抱着渴望获胜的心理，这就使参加活动的学生有兴趣学、主动积极地去学，能最大限度地调动学生学习的主动性和积极性，掀起课堂学习的高潮。
2、Let’s do(课本P46)
(1)看动作猜单词：
师拿图片给一个学生看一看。该生上前做动作，其余学生猜单词。总结出较合理的统一动作：Watch Tv, read a book, have a snack,take a shower, have a sleep.
(2)跟老师边说边做：Watch Tv/ read a book/have a sleep/…….
(3)根据音乐节奏边说边做课本P46的Let’s do。
设计意图：
让学生在有节奏的歌谣中感受语言，在轻松愉快的语言活动中输入语言，让他们在做中学，在唱中学，在玩中学。“TPR”教学法认为：一种对学生的言语输出不做严格要求并带有游戏性质的方法可以减少学生的心理负担，培养愉快的学习情绪，提高学习的效率。
3、语言训练：Welcome to my home:
(1) Learn to say: Welcome to my home. (板书，揭题)
Look!This is my home.
You can see a bedroom,a livingroom
……
I like my home.
(2) Group work: Intrduce my home.
(3)汇报交流。
设计意图:
情感态度是影响学生学习和发展的重要因素。结合生活实际创设交际情境，既能巩固所学的新单词，进行语言训练，又能激发学生对家的热爱。
在汇报交流这一环节中，教师要注重引导学生尽量用学过的语句进行交流：This is my home，It’s big. It’s nice, I like my home.
IV、 Extension(扩展练习)：
(1)欣赏简短动画。
(2)听歌曲：My bedroom.
(3)课外延伸：小小设计家，充分发挥想象，设计一套房子并布置各个房间，在各个房间里画上一些学过的物品，涂好颜色。下节课展示。
设计意图：
小学英语二级视听要求学生能看懂英文动画片和程度相当的英语节目。欣赏简短动画,可以训练学生的英语能力。
英语教案 篇2
一、学情分析
本节课的授课对象是小学四年级学生。四年级学生经过近两年的英语学习，有了简单的英语基础知识和听说读写的能力;同时，学生对英语学习有着较浓厚的兴趣，喜欢表达自己的观点，也具备初步的自主、合作、探究能力。
二、 教学内容
本课是安徽外研社小学英语Book4 Unit5 Lesson5.是一节单独的语音课。本节课的重点是启发学生通过仔细听读单词，自己区别出oo字母组合的不同发音，让学生获得成功感，进而提升自主学习的能力。
三、教学目标
1.知识目标：能够听懂，读懂音标[u]和[u]及例词food, spoon, zoo, boots,book,cook,look,good
2.能力目标：
(动口和动手的好习惯，初步形成主动学习的意识。
(2)培养学生的分析能力。
3.情感目标：
(1)进一步提高学生对英语的学习热情及学习兴趣。
(2)鼓励学生积极主动参与课堂活动，大胆开口，主动模仿。
四、教学过程：
Step1. Warming up
1、Greeting each other。
2、Sing a song“Who’s she?”
Step2. Presentation
Show “oo” on the blackboard. What does the “oo” sound like in the word? 播放录音，学生听。
Can you find the difference? 请学生试着说出含有oo 字母组合的单词的不同之处。
Write two “oo”on the blackboard. List two lines of words.
将单词区分呈现，并标出不同的音标。并请学生朗读。
Step3.Practice
Look，Write，Match
Read.Say.将所学单词融合在一段短文中，可以使知识更加系统，简单，生动。而且通过这样的训练，真正将语音落到实处。
Step4.Extension
请学生们想一想其他的含有oo字母组合的单词，并大声朗读
Play a game: Find your families.教学方法：小组活动加TPR教学法
【案例分析】：
语言知识和语言技能是综合运用能力的基础，而学好语音又是掌握语言知识和语言技能的垫脚石。语言学家和心理学家的发现表明，语言的学习不仅对外语学习者口语的提高至关重要，也直接影响其听力水平。如果学生发音不准，即使他听到这个单词也很难辨认出，更谈不上用英语交流了。
学习国际音标的主要目的是培养学生的拼读能力。单纯的语音学习确实比较单调乏味，但只要我们多花点心思，在教法上多做文章，乏味的音标教学一样会变得趣味黯然。例如，小组活动，游戏教学，TPR教学方法都有利于提高学生学习的兴趣和效果。因此，我们英语教师在语音教学应不断地实践总结适合小学生的趣味活泼的教学方式。另外，教学在课堂上要善于调动学生的学习积极性，发挥学生的主观能动性。只有学生的内在动机被激发了，各项活动才能有效地发挥作用。
英语教案 篇3
Unit 1 Playing Sports
Topic 1 Are you going to play basketball?
Section A
The main activities are 1a and 2. 本课重点活动是1a和2。
Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标
1. Learn some new words and phrases:
almost, against, term, cheer, cheer … on, team, win, row, quite, bit, quite a bit / a lot, join, club, skate, volleyball, tennis, table tennis
2. Learn some useful sentences:
(1)I saw you play basketball almost every day during the summer holidays.
(2)Would you like to come and cheer us on?
3. Learn the future tense with be going to:
(1)We are going to have a basketball game against Class Three on Sunday.
(2)Are you going to join the school rowing club?
4. Talk about preferences:
—Which sport do you prefer, cycling or rowing?
—I prefer rowing.
5. Talk about sports and games.
Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具
图片/海报/教学挂图/录音机/小黑板
Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
Step 1 Review 第一步 复习(时间:7分钟)
复习学过的运动项目名称，引出生词。
1. (展示一些有关运动的图片，并通过师生对话，引出新的运动项目名称。)
T: Welcome back to school, boys and girls. The new term begins. This is our first English lesson this term. Did you enjoy yourselves during your summer holidays? What did you do during your holidays? Did you do sports during your summer holidays?
Ss: …
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
term
T: We all know doing sports is good for our health. Now let’s review some sports and learn some new ones.
(展示学生在打篮球的图片。)
T: Look at the picture. Do you know what they are doing? S1, please.
S1: They are playing basketball.
T: Do you like playing basketball?
S1: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
T: How many players are there in the basketball team?
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
team
S1: There are five players.
(展示学生在打排球的图片。)
T: What are they doing? S2, do you know?
S2: They are playing volleyball. (教师帮助该生回答。)
(板书并要求学生掌握。)
volleyball
(用同样的方式引出生词cycle, row, skate, tennis, table tennis, ski。)
(板书，并让学生跟读，要求学生理解cycle, ski;掌握row, skate, tennis, table tennis。)
cycle, row, skate, tennis, table tennis, ski
2. (用黑板上有关运动的生词操练，导出prefer的用法。)
T: Which sport do you like better, cycling or rowing?
S3: Rowing.
T: Good! The phrase “like … better” means “prefer”.
(板书并要求学生理解。)
prefer
T: S4, which sport do you prefer, basketball or soccer?
S4: I prefer basketball.
…
Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间:10分钟)
通过师生对话，呈现1a中部分生词及功能句，并使学生初步掌握be going to句型。
1. (利用plan to do sth.，导入“be going to+do”结构。)
T: I’m very glad you all like doing sports and know a lot about them. Do you want to play volleyball tomorrow afternoon? S1, please.
S¬1: Yes, I do.
T: So you plan to play volleyball tomorrow afternoon, right?
S1: Yes.
T: OK. When we plan to do something, we can say we are going to do something.
(板书，学习新语法。)
be going to do sth.
T: When I tell you my plan, you retell it with be going to. OK, boys and girls?
Ss: OK.
T: I plan to go out for dinner tonight. S2, please.
S2: You are going to go out for dinner tonight.
T: I plan to climb mountains tomorrow. S3, please.
S3: You are going to climb mountains tomorrow.
T: Good! When we express something that is going to happen or we plan to do something, we can use be going to.
2. (教师让几个学生说说明天户外活动的打算，并引出be going to结构的一般疑问句式，过渡到1a。)
T: OK, S4, please tell me what you plan to do tomorrow afternoon.
S4: I’m going to swim with my brother tomorrow afternoon.
T: Are you going to swim?
S4: Yes, I am.
(板书，学习新句型。)
—Are you going to swim?
—Yes, I am.
(教师视学生掌握的情况来决定是否要进行更多的操练。)
3. (展示一幅即将进行篮球赛的海报，引出单词against, cheer和短语cheer … on。)
T: Now look at the poster. Here is the news. Our class is going to have a basketball game against Class 3 at 5:00 this afternoon. Would you like to cheer them on?
Ss:Yes, we’d love to./I’d love to.
(板书，让学生猜词义，并要求掌握。)
against, cheer, cheer ... on
(出示教学挂图，让学生看图片猜测对话内容，导入1a。)
T: Look at this picture. They are Kangkang and Michael. What are they talking about? Can you guess? Please listen to 1a and then answer the following questions.
(出示小黑板。)
(1) Which class is Michael’s class going to play against?
(2) Is Kangkang going to cheer them on?
(听后核对答案。)
4. (学生朗读1a，画出疑难点和关键词，然后教师解释疑难点。)
(出示小黑板，领读关键词;解释并要求学生掌握almost和win。)
basketball—saw—play—almost—every day—against—Sunday—game—term—come— cheer … on—I’d love to—hope—win
Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间:10分钟)
创设情景，编对话，在真实的语境中培养学生口头交流能力。
1. (根据小黑板上的关键词，分角色表演对话。)
T: OK. Now you can use the key words above to act out the dialog in roles.
2. (教师引导学生，通过讨论新学期的计划来操练be going to+do句型。)
(教师先做示范，然后让学生两人一组练习。)
T: S1, what are you going to do this term?
S1: I’m going to learn English better.
T: What about you, S2?
S2: I’m going to study math hard.
T: Oh, it’s a good plan. S3, do you know what your partner is going to do?
S3: Yes. He is going to learn rowing.
T: Discuss with your partner what you are going to do this term.
3. (创设情景，依据1a编对话，巩固1a及be going to+do句型，完成1b。)
T: Just now you talked about your plans for this term. Now suppose you meet your classmate on the playground and you want to talk about your plans for this week. Please make a similar conversation with your partner according to 1a. You can use the key words on the blackboard.
(板书)
be going to, play, I’m afraid, homework, summer, play against, I hope
(学生两人一组编对话，教师进行鼓励启发，必要时应给予帮助。)
Example:
S4: Hi, S5.
S5: Hi, S4. I am going to play … Are you going to play with us?
S4: I’m afraid I can’t. I have to do my homework first. By the way, I saw you play … almost every day during the summer holidays.
S5: Yes. You know I am going to play in the … game against Class 2 this Saturday. Would you like to come and cheer us on?
S4: Of course. I’d love to. And I hope you will win.
(让几组学生到教室前面表演类似的对话，评出表演组及演员等。)
(教师出示2中运动项目的图片，引导学生巩固be going to + do句型，使他们熟练掌握其用法，并自然过渡到2。)
Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习(时间:10分钟)
完成2和3，培养学生听说能力，并通过大量操练，使他们熟练运用含有be going to的一般疑问句及掌握prefer的用法。
1. (通过看图片，练习be going to的用法，导入2。)
T: Look at the pictures, what are they going to do?
Ss: (Picture 1) They are going to go skating.
(Picture 2) They are going to go skiing.
…
T: Which sport do you prefer, … or …?
S1: I prefer …
T: What about you, S2?
S2: I prefer …
T: S3, do you often go swimming?
S3: Yes, very often.
T: Good. You can also say “quite a lot/a bit”. “Do you often go swimming?” means “Do you go swimming much?”
(板书，并领读，要求学生掌握quite, bit和quite a lot/a bit。)
quite, bit
very often = quite a lot/a bit
I go swimming very often.= I go swimming much.
T: S4, do you go rowing much?
S4: Yes, quite a lot/a bit.
T: S5, do you go skiing much?
S5: Yes, quite a lot / a bit.(肯)
S6: No, seldom.(否)
T: Oh, you don’t like sports. It isn’t good. I think you should join a sports club, and maybe you will like sports there.
(板书，教学生词，并要求学生掌握。)
join, club
T: Discuss with your partner which sports club you would like to join.
S7: I am going to join the school rowing club.
S8: …
(学生两人一组完成2，除了可以用书上所给的运动名称，也可用他们所知道的其他运动名称进行对话。)
2. (让学生听3录音，并完成3。)
T: Michael and Kangkang like doing sports a lot. Do you want to know what sports they often do on weekends? Listen to the tape, then fill in the chart in 3.
(再放录音3，核对答案。)
3. (做一个运用“be going to+do”句型的游戏。)
(挑选若干学生上台，做关于运动的动作，该动作要能使同学们明白并成功猜出运动名称。猜到的同学要用be going to+do询问做动作的同学，以证实自己的猜测是否正确。)
T: Please do an action about your favorite sport.
(S10表演一个动作。)
S9: Are you going to play basketball?
S10: No, I’m not.
S9: Are you going to play volleyball?
S10: Yes, I am.
…
英语教案 篇4
一、问候
T:Good morning,children.
S:Good morning,teacher.
二、热身
1、律动《What do you want》
2、复习上节课词汇，句子
三、词汇导入
拿出袋子，里面放好pear,mango,litchi,grapes的模型。对小朋友说教师手中的是魔法袋，里面有神奇的东西，让小朋友伸手进去触摸，猜猜是什么，来引出pear,mango,litchi,grapes的教读。
四、游戏
1、拍气球边拍边念，请两个小朋友上来，哪个小朋友掌握的好就有奖励。
2、看嘴型说单词
教师分别轻声说出pear,mango,litchi,grapes让小朋友们看嘴型辨音说出单词，哪个小朋友反应的最好得奖励。
五、律动
六、今天所学单词
pear,mango,litchi,grapes
T:Class is over,goodbye.
S:Goodbye.
英语教案 篇5
大班英语教案介绍自己3篇
英语老师要为学生提供自主学习和直接交流的机会，以及充分表现和自我发展的一个空间。英语教案对所有英语老师的教学工作有着重要的帮助。你是否在找正准备撰写“大班英语教案介绍自己”，下面小编收集了相关的素材，供大家写文参考！
大班英语教案介绍自己篇1
学情分析：
五年级1班，全班46人。学生学习习惯一般，对语言的感知和接受能力比一般，能够进行自主学习和合作解决问题。
结合本单元主题wild animals我确定了本节课的具体内容，从词汇和课文内容入手，进行引伸和拓展，使学生通过本单元的学习能介绍wild animal，用较通顺、较连贯一段话介绍某种野生动物。从而达到拓展学生的课外知识和综合运用能力的目的。
目标陈述：
通过学习jungle，zoo-keeper,peel等新词，以及what do they like? Where does i live? 等句型，理解关于动物的短文，并根据自己的学习情况来描述一个动物。同时渗透爱护自然，保护动物的德育思想。
重点难点：
学会有顺序地描写一个动物。
教辅用品：
tape records flash PPT
教学目标：
1. Learn the words : wild, peel, zoo-keeper, jungle,
Learn the sentences: Where does it live? What does it like?
2. Learn to describe a kind of wild animals.
3. Try to stimulate the students’ interests of English.
重点难点：
Try to describe a kind of wild animals more orderly.
教学准备：
tape records flash PPT
教学过程：
I. Pre-task preparations
1、 jungle
2、 play a game： Wild animals Farm animals 5. a rhyme
Watch a viedo T:Can you tell me what is the name of this book? (read:jungle)
Tongue Twister T:The large giraffe is jumping in the jungle.
T :Talk about what animals can you see in the jungle?
S1: We can see pigs.
S2:We can see dogs
T :Talk about what animals can you see
通过观看森林王子的 预告片，更直观的了解 丛林。了解自然。 通过一个游戏，讨论农村动物和野生动物的 区别，引出野生动物的概念。on the farm?
S1: We can see tigers.
S2:We can see pandas.
II. While-task procedures
Passage one .
Passage two
Passage three
1 Listen and answer
T :What colour is the monkey?
S: It is black. T :Is it big or small?
S: It is big
T :What colour is the monkey?
S: It is black.
T :Does it have long arms and long legs?
S: Yes,it does
2 Judge with T or F
1)The monkey doesn’t have long arms or legs.
2) The monkey can climb to the top of the cage.
3) It has a pink face.
4) The monkey can swing on the rope.
通过听力引出第一段， 然后通过短文判断。最后让学生进行讨论，让同学们自己总结出其 他动物的特点。
通过半开放性的问题，进行讨论，让同学们自己总结出饲养员的工作。 通过一首诗歌，让同学 们进一步巩固所学知识，活跃课堂气氛。 进行德育教育，让学生 们知道不能随便喂动 物错误的食品，要爱护 动物，我们是朋友。
让学生进行讨论，让同学们总结出所有野生动物身上的特点。
5) The monkey is big and brown.
3 look and say
T: Can you say something about other animal?
1)learn: zoo-keeper
2) ask and swer
T:What do the zoo-keepers do for the animals?
T:What animal does this zoo-keeper feed? Does he like the baby monkeys?
T:Can you say something about the zoo-keeper?
3)describe the
Zoo-keeper
Answer the questions T:Read the passage . Then answer the questions.
S1:What do they like?
S2:at don’t they eat?
S3:What is this monkey doing?
S4:How is the monkey now?
S5:Can you feed the monkeys sweets?
Read a poem Eating bananas 'Bananas,' says the monkey, 'Are what I like to eat, And if my hands are busy I can peel them with my feet.'
Mae some notices: Love the animals. Don’t feed them the wrong food. We are friends.
look and say Look at these animals.
They have _______. _________________
They can _________. _________________.
They like _____. They do not eat _____.
We can’t feed them _____.
We can feed them________.
III. Post-task activities
Make an interview(采访)
Homework:
1.Passage reading: Pandas
2.Choose one animal and write.
Reporter(记者)： Good morning, Mr Tang.
Zoo-keeper: Good morning.
Reporter: Can I ask you some questions?
Zoo-keeper:Sure./Of course.
Reporter: What animal do you like?
Are they …? Do they have…?
Can they…? Do they like…?
Where do they live?
通过一段记者与动物 管理员的采访对话，进一步活跃课堂气氛，巩固所学的知识点。
回家作业，第一通过短文的阅读让学生了解其他的野生动物，熊猫。
第二，让学生选择一样自己喜欢的动物进行描述。
Zoo-keeper: …。
Reporter: Thank you very much.
Zoo-keeper: You’re welcome.
Answer the questions： Where do the pandas live?
What do the pandas live on?
What colour are pandas? What do the pandas like to do?
How do you think of pandas?
There are not many pandas in the world now.
Why? T:Please choose one animal and write.
大班英语教案介绍自己篇2
一、教学目标
情绪的单词：feel, sad, angry, happy, worried, afraid。
能完成本页的看图完成句子的活动
二、教学重点
1. 能够听、说、读、写有关情绪的单词：feel, sad, angry, happy, worried, afraid。
2. 能够正确使用上述单词描述自己或他人的情绪
三、教学难点 Let’s wrap it up板块
四、教 学 过 程
【自主学习】
1.Greeting
2.引用学过句型，How does he \she feel ?操练交流。引出People have different feelings .
教师利用挂图呈现A Let’s learn 板块第一幅插图，提问学生：Who is she? What is it? What are they doing? How does Sarah feel? Why?引导学生谈论图片，引出并教授描述Sarah和小猫不同的情绪单词：angry，afraid.
【合作探究】
1、教师利用视频呈现不同动物的表情和动作，引出观点:Animals have feelings .
2、教师播放小狗puppy 的视频，整体呈现并教授描述情绪和心理状态的词汇，如：angry，afraid等，教师提问学生：what is puppy doing ?how does it feel ? What will it do ? 要求学生将小狗的情绪和动作进行匹配。
3、教师呈现A;Let ‘s learn 板块的挂图，与学生谈论图片 ：not only the dog ,but also the cat has feelings,too .chen jie has a pet cat ,what are they doing ? How does sarah feel ?how does the cat feel ? Why ? 要求学生观察图片，猜测Sarah和宠物猫的情绪，并进行简单的描述。
【展示交流】
1、记忆游戏
教师出示四幅编好号的图片。教师描述图片，学生迅速找出对应的图片并报出号码。也可以变成教师报数，学生说出对应的单词或句子。
2 学生制作本课的单词卡片，每张写有一个表达情心理状态的单词，是大写字母，如： sad, worried, happy.学生四人一组，学生A快速展示一张卡片再放下，其他三名学生说出所见单词。首先，说出的得一分，然后到学生B展示卡片，以此类推，得分最多者获胜。
大班英语教案介绍自己篇3
教学目标：
1、能够听、说、读、写短语：on foot, by bike, by bus, by train。
2、能够听、说、认读短语：by plane, by ship, by subway。
3、能用句子 “how do you go to school? how do you go to canada/…?” 来替换询问别人的出行方式;并能够用句子 “i go by…” 进行回答。
4、听懂、会吟唱let's chant的歌谣。
5、帮助学生了解交通规则，并在生活中自觉遵守交通规则。
教学重难点：
掌握四会短语和a let's learn部分中运用某种交通工具去某地的表达法，并能替换关键词进行问答。
课前准备：
1、教师准备let's start部分和主情景图的教学课件。
2、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
3、教师准备a let's learn部分的单词卡片。
教学步骤：
一、热身(warm-up)
1、复习副词：always，usually，often，sometimes，never的读音与词义。
t: when do you get up? / when do you go to school? … (引导学生用always，usually，often，sometimes回答)
2、t：today i go to school by bus. i usually go to school on foot. 教师利用肢体动作帮助学生理解句子意思。
t：what about you? do you go by bike or by bus? do you go on foot? or by car? 师生之间自由会话，引出几种常见的交通方式。引导学生看本课let's start部分的标图并回答问题。
二、预习(preview)
1、let's chant
教师放本课let's chant部分的录音，唱到on foot时，全班跺跺脚;唱到by car/ bike/ bus/ plane/ train的时候，学生做出相应的动作。然后教师根据歌谣内容随机出示let's learn部分的单词卡片加深学生印象，全班学生再跟录音边唱边做一遍。
三、新课呈现(presentation)
let's learn
1、教师做动作，自问自答： “how do i go to school? i go to school by bike.” 并在黑板上写下：by bike。教师再重复刚才的句子并问某一学生： what about you? how do you go to school? 教师帮助学生说出完整的句子： “i go to school by…” 并将相应的短语写在黑板上。
2、看短语贴卡片游戏
教师依次出示画着不同交通工具的短语卡片，让学生迅速地贴在黑板上的by短语旁边，教师领读短语和句子 “l go to school by...”
3、“快速反应” 游戏
教师说出某个短语，如：by bike，让学生做相应的动作并说出句子，如：i go to school by bike.
4、教师拿出刚才学生可能没有提到的交通工具的图片，如：by plane/subway/ ship/ boat等，呈现和练习这些短语。然后指着课本上的配图问：“what can you see in the pictures?” 注意引导学生理解"地铁"的含义： “it's an underground railway in a city. it travels very fast.” 教师领读新学短语。
5、学生听录音，跟读let's learn部分的内容。教师注意纠正学生的语音、语调。
6、教师引导学生进行单词的拼读竞赛。可空出单词中的元音字母让学生填写, 也可打乱组成单词的字母的顺序，让学生重新排序，组成单词。
7、let's play
教师请学生说一些地点，比如：school, beijing, the us, the moon等;教师鼓励学生大胆想象出行方式和所去地点。然后学生两人结对进行句型操练，一人问 “how do you go to beijing/ the usa/ the moon?” 另一学生给出答案： “i go by train/ plane/ spaceship. ”
四、巩固和延伸(consolidation and extension)
1、教师引导学生看主情景图，说出其中表现的交通方式。学生多能说出：on foot， by bike, by subway。如有学生问及小丑骑的独轮车以及幼儿骑的三轮儿童车教师可补充说明那分别是unicycle和tricycle;而自行车bike的另一说法：bicycle，意为两轮车。
2、学生做let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习;教师指导学生规范书写。新学伊始，教师非常有必要对学生重申一下书写的要求。
五、homework
1、学生背诵并抄写四会单词;
2、学生预习c let's sing部分的歌曲。
英语教案 篇6
6.________ vt. & vi. (使)震惊;震动
13.________ vt.损害;伤害→________ n.伤害;损害→________ adj.受伤的
14.________ n.电;电流;电学→________ adj.用电的;带电的'→________ adj.与电有关的;电学的
1.a (great) number ________许多;大量的
8.tens ________ thousands of数以万计
EX.2 On seeing Jay Chow appear on the stage, the audience burst out _________ (cheer).
EX.1 All the towns were/lay in _____ (ruin) after the earthquake.
EX.2过量吸烟损害健康，因此你应该戒烟。
Heavy smoking ruins your health, so you should give up smoking.
EX.3用ruin, destroy, damage填空：
① Her heart was slightly _______ as a result of her long illness.
② His life was ________ by drink.
③ The earthquake almost _______ all the bridges in this area.
Exs.
①The soldier was ______ in the arm in the war.
②She was ______ slightly in an accident during the work.
③This bright light will do great ______ to your eyes.
④I was very much ______ at his words.
看例句再归纳：
1. I was shocked to hear that 17 people died in the explosion at a restaurant in Anhui.
2. I was shocked at the news that 17 people died in the explosion at a restaurant in Anhui.
3. I was shocked that 17 people died
in the explosion at a restaurant in Anhui.
excite, discourage, disappoint, encourage, inspire, interest, move, please, puzzle, surprise, worry…
trap sb. into (doing) sth.
EX.1警察设圈套使他讲出实情。
telling the truth.
他陷入交通堵塞中，感到很无助。
1) He ___________ (trap) in the traffic jam and felt helpless.
2) When he __________ (trap) in the traffic jam, he felt helpless.
3) When __________ (trap) in the traffic jam, he felt helpless.
set a trap to do sth./for…
① The army organized teams to dig out those who were trapped and to bury
② He has learnt to bury his feelings.
③ You’ll never solve your problems if you just bury your head in the sand----you have to face them.
bury…in…
把……埋到……里;使……沉浸于……
④ She buried her face in her hands and wept.
EX.1对比练习：
他埋头学习，不知道他的同学们早已经离开了。
1. As he ____________ (bury) in his study, he didn’t know that his classmates had left.
2. As he __________ (bury) himself in his study, he didn’t know that his classmates had left.
3. _____ (bury) in his study, he didn’t know that his classmates had left.
4. ________(bury) himself in his study, he didn’t know that his classmates had left.
7. =right now/ at once/in no time
8. by the end of到时候为止(常与_________连用)
9. EX.2 By the end of last month, he _________(learn) 3,000 English
10. words or so.
11. EX.3我会用爱迪生的一句名言来结束。
12. I’ll end up with a famous saying from Edison.
14. a (great/large) number of +(pl.) n.
15. the number of+(pl.)n.
16. EX.1 The number of foreign students attending Chinese universities_________ (be) rising steadily since 1990.
17. EX.2 ----The number of students are in
19. ----Yes. The number of students
21. 11. Thousands of families were killed and many children were left without parents.
22. leave做使役动词，意为___________________
23. leave+宾语+宾补{doing sth.
25. {to do sth.
27. EX.1 You shouldn’t have left water ___________(run).
28. EX.2 She ran away _____________________
29. _______________. (她跑开了，留下她的男友
31. 12. It seemed as if the world was at an end!
32. → as if用于陈述语气中：
33. It looks as if it’s going to rain.
34. She closed her eyes as if she was tired.
35. → as if用于虚拟语气中：
36. 1). She behaved as if nothing ______________(happen).
37. →as if___________ “似乎要做某事”
38. 2). He opened his mouth as if _________ something. (say)
39. 12. It seemed as if the world was at an end!
40. → as if用于陈述语气中：
41. It looks as if it’s going to rain.
42. She closed her eyes as if she was tired.
43. → as if用于虚拟语气中：
44. 1). She behaved as if nothing ______________(happen).
45. →as if___________ “似乎要做某事”
46. 2). He opened his mouth as if _________ something. (say)
47. 13.Translate the following sentences:
48. 1). All hope was not lost.
49.
50. 2). Not everyone has passed the exam.
51. 3). I don’t want both the ties.
52.部分否定/半否定:
53. all/both/every... not...(not all/both/every…)
55. EX.1 ________ people can understand you.
56. = _____ people can _____understand you.
57.并不是所有的人都能理解你。
全部否定：
no, never, none, neither, nobody,
nothing, no one, nowhere…
EX.2这两个男孩对我们都不粗鲁。
Neither of the boys is rude to us.
One night, everything began ___________ (shake), with the pipes _________ (burst) and the electricity cut off. It seemed that the world was ______ an end. Some people were ______ (injure), some buried in the _______ (ruin) and some missing. Judging from the situation, there were ______ number of ______ (trap) people waiting for the rescue. But all hope was not lost, ________ soldiers were soon sent to help ______. With the help of the soldiers, everything returned to _______ (peaceful).
英语教案 篇7
教学目标：
一) 认知目标
1.句型和语言点(见教学重点)。
2.用所学的知识与伙伴进行交流、沟通，学会改错、写作。
二)情感目标
利用多媒体手段营造积极和谐教学氛围，使学生不自觉地进入情景之中，充分调动学生的思维活动和情感体验，引起学生的共鸣。
三)智力目标
在运用语言的过程中培养学生的观察力、分析力、想象力和自学能力，帮 助学生加强记忆力，提高思维能力和运用英语的综合能力，激发创造能力。
教材分析：
这是高三复习阶段的一节写作课。这节书面表达课就从审题谋篇等方面入手来完成教学目的，侧重于引导学生在把握书面表达的写作前准备即谋篇审题能力，使学生在动手写作前迅速构思按照规范的模式来完成谋篇审题：在教学中不仅仅强调写,对于与写作紧密联系的听、说、读、改错都有兼顾。采用任务型教学法和小组合作探究学习法，从而激发学生的学习兴趣，同时也能扩大课堂的语料输入量及学生的语言输出量。
教学重点：
1. 学会审题和谋篇
2. 掌握多样化的表达方式
3. 熟练各段中的固定写作套路
教学难点：
1. 如何帮助学生运用写作策略，促进学生自主写作。
2. 使学生了解谋篇的重要性，培养谋篇的能力和习惯。
教学方法：
1、活动教学法：
2、任务型教学法：
教学设计：
Step 1. Warming up
Come up with some proverbs for the students to put them into Chinese.
Recitation is of the first importance in any language learning!
Practice makes perfect! …
What do you learn from the above proverbs?
Step 2. Presentation
Make it clear to the students the importance of writing in English subject of the college entrance exams and then the goals of this lesson.
Step 3. Exhibition
Show on the whiteboard a writing.
英语教案 篇8
教学准备
教学目标
知识目标
1.Get students to learn the useful words and expressions in this unit.
eyesight，ambition，disabled，beneficial，in other words，clumsy，adapt，microscope，out of breath，absence，stupid，fellow，annoyed，all in all，industry，tank，make fun of，encouragement，adapt to
2.Help students to learn about disabilities and life of the disabled.
能力目标
1.Let students read the passage Marty's Story to develop their reading ability.
2.Enable students to know that people with disabilities can also live well.
情感目标
1.By talking about disabilities and life of the disabled，make sure students can learn some positive stories of the disabled.
2.Help them understand more about how challenging life can be for the disabled.
3.Develop students' sense of cooperative learning.
教学重难点
教学重点
Get students inspired by positive stories of the people with disabilities.
教学难点
1.Develop students' reading ability.
2.Help students understand the difficulties the disabled have to overcome.
教学过程
?Step 1Warming up
1.Warming up by discussing
First ask students to talk about people with a mental or physical disability to see how much they know about disabilities. Then show some photos of people with disabilities. Students will be asked to discuss the following questions in small groups.
Do you know any famous people who are disabled?
What difficulties do they have to overcome in daily life?
What have they achieved?
Suggested answers：
Steven Hawking has a muscle disease，but he makes great contributions in science and puts forward his theory about black holes.
Beethoven was deaf in one ear when he was 26 and totally deaf at the age of 35，but he was a great composer.
Helen Keller was deaf and blind，but she was a great writer.
2.Warming up by talking
First，ask students to look at the pictures and read what these people have achieved even though they each have a disability. Next，work with partners to talk about what disability they might have according to each description below the picture.
英语教案 篇9
大学语文英语教案
导言：
大学语文英语教案是指在大学语文英语教学中，教师为了提高教学效果，合理组织教学内容，制定的具体教学计划。本文将通过详细、具体、生动的方式介绍大学语文英语教案的编写过程和实施方法，旨在帮助大学教师更好地开展教学工作。
一、教案编写的目的和意义
编写教案的目的在于合理规划教学过程，推进学生的学习效果，提高教学质量。具体来说，教案的编写有以下几个方面的意义：
1. 促进师生互动：教案作为教师和学生共同参与的教学工具，可以促进师生之间的互动和交流。通过教案的编写，教师能够更好地准备教学内容，了解学生的学习情况，从而更好地进行教学。
2. 优化教学过程：教案的编写可以帮助教师有针对性地选择教学资源和教学方法，合理安排教学步骤，使教学过程更加顺利和高效。
3. 提高学生学习效果：教案可以帮助学生更好地理解和吸收所学知识，准确把握学习要点和方法，提高学习效果。
二、教案的编写步骤
1. 教学目标的确定：根据大纲和教学要求，明确本节课的教学目标，包括知识目标、能力目标和情感目标。
2. 教学内容的选择：根据教学目标，选择适当的教学内容。内容要贴近学生的实际生活和学习需求，能够激发学生的学习兴趣，培养学生的思维能力和语言表达能力。
3. 教学资源的准备：根据教学内容，准备相应的教学资源，包括课本、多媒体课件、教学实例等，确保教学过程中的教学资源的充分利用。
4. 教学方法的选择：根据教学目标和学生的特点，选择符合教学内容的教学方法。可以采用讲授法、讨论法、实验法、情景模拟法等多种教学方法，使学生更好地掌握知识和技能。
5. 教学步骤的设计：根据教学内容和教学方法，设计具体的教学步骤。包括引入新课、知识点的讲解与拓展、实例分析与练习、归纳总结等环节。
6. 教学评价的设计：设计合适的教学评价方式，既能够检测学生的学习效果，又能够激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性。可以采用测验、口头询问、小组合作等多种方式进行评价。
三、教案的实施方法
1. 教师主导教学：教师应充分了解学生的学习情况，根据学生的学习需求和特点，合理安排教学内容、教学步骤和教学方法。在教学过程中，要注重启发学生的思维，培养学生的创新精神和团队合作能力。
2. 学生参与互动：教师要注重营造积极向上的课堂氛围，鼓励学生互相学习、交流和合作。通过小组合作、讨论和分享，激发学生的学习兴趣和主动性。
3. 教学资源的利用：教师要善于利用各种教学资源，提高教学效果。可以使用多媒体课件、实例分析、教育影片等资源，丰富教学内容，激发学生的学习兴趣。
4. 及时调整教学策略：在教学过程中，教师要灵活运用不同的教学策略，根据学生的学习状况进行及时调整。要关注学生的反馈和问题，积极解决学生的困惑，提高教学效果。
大学语文英语教案的编写和实施是提高教学质量的重要环节。通过合理安排教学内容、教学步骤和教学方法，教师能够提高学生的学习效果，培养学生的综合能力。在教学过程中，教师要注重教学资源的充分利用，合理运用不同的教学策略，激发学生的学习兴趣和主动性。只有不断改进教学方法和教学手段，才能更好地促进学生的全面发展。
英语教案 篇10
1、教师拿出红、绿两种颜色纸：what colour is it？复习巩固red blue，并且认读。
2、教师拿出黄色纸：is it red？is it blue？教学yellow。教师拿出一片叶子教学green教师拿出一个自制的红绿灯教学一首小诗：red，red stop；yellow yellow wait；green green go go go！
3、t show an orange：what’s this？it’s an orange。what colour is it？it’s orange。t：orange is orange。
4、show a peach：what colour is it？it’s pink。教学粉红色。
5、show a chocolate：what colour is it？it’s brown。教学棕色。
6、show a grape：what colour is it？it’s purple。教学紫色。
7、read together
英语教案 篇11
活动目标
理解并会用词汇noodles,bread,meat,dumplings
活动准备
卡片苍蝇指环
活动过程
一、问候T:Good morning,children.S:Good morning,teacher.二、热身1、律动《Who Says》2、复习上节课词汇，句子。三、词汇导入妈妈去超市买食物，先买了noodles,教师出示卡片教读。然后组与组比赛，看哪一组读的最棒。再依次买的是bread,meat,dumplings.四、游戏1、I say you do,you say I do用手势动作教小朋友表达noodles,bread,meat,dumplings.然后老师念单词，小朋友做出动作。最后小朋友念单词，老师做出动作。2、赶走苍蝇教师戴着苍蝇指环扮演苍蝇，苍蝇飞到哪个食物卡上，小朋友就念出那个单词来赶走苍蝇。接下来请小朋友上台玩这个游戏。五、律动。六、今天所学单词。noodles,bread,meat,dumplingsT:Class is over,goodbye.
跑步比赛教案
作为一个读者，我觉得“跑步比赛教案”是众多文章中的精品。同时，学生们在课堂上能够体验到生动有趣的教学，离不开老师事先准备好的教案和课件。现在，大家可以开始动手写自己的课堂教案和课件了。认真编写教案和课件对于教学的连续性和可持续性大有裨益。非常感谢您的关注和阅读！
跑步比赛教案(篇1)
活动目标
1发展幼儿跑的能力，增强腿部力量。
2培养幼儿团结合作的精神。
活动准备
在场地上画好一条直线作起跑线和终点线
活动玩法
老师把幼儿分成两组，分别站在起点线后面，听信号，老师说：“跑”各组第一名幼儿
将开始跑，一直跑到终点线，然后各组第二名幼儿就接着跑，跑到终点线，就这样依次进行，直到最后一名幼儿跑完，那一组幼儿最先跑完，就那一组为胜。
活动要求
跑的时候不可以跨出起跑线，不然作犯规。
注意事项
跑的时候注意安全，不要相互碰撞。
《跳绳毽》游戏活动
活动目标
发展幼儿腿部力量及动作的灵敏性，协调性，准确性，提高平衡能力。
活动内容：踢绳毽
活动方法
1踢绳毽（毽子上面拴一根绳子）手持绳端，用脚的内侧，外侧或两脚交替踢毽。
2一踢一接毽子（鸡毛毽）用手托毽子，轻轻上抛，用一脚内侧踢毽子，再用手接住。反复练习抛，踢，接的动作，还可以用手，脚，面，抬平大腿等处接毽子。
3连续踢毽子，用左（右）叫内侧，或外侧连续踢毽子，使毽子不落地，也可以用左右脚交替连续的踢毽子。
4集体踢毽子，两人，三人或多人围成圈，交替或轮流踢毽子，使毽子不落地。
规则要求
1按照规定动作及要求踢毽子。
2踢毽子过程中，如果未踢中或未接住毽子，使毽子落地则为失败。
3记数比赛时，从踢中次数最多的一队为胜。
教与学提示
1年龄小的幼儿，以踢绳毽为主。
2先让幼儿个人掌握简单的，不同的绳毽子方法，然后再变换花样或进行比赛。
3因地制宜制作各种不同的毽子，进行踢绳毽子游戏活动。
《小白兔钻山洞》游戏活动
活动目标
发展幼儿听信号快速变换方向的能力。
活动过程
1老师先向幼儿介绍游戏的名称及玩法。
名称：《小白兔钻山洞》
玩法：1将参加游戏的人，分成人数相等的三个活两个小组，第一组和第二组幼儿，每个人手拉手举起来，组成一个山洞。第三组的幼儿就能扮小白兔。
2游戏开始后，老师将小白兔集合在一起，手拉手边跳边唱。一二组扮山洞的幼儿也随着唱歌，一会儿老师突然喊：“狼来了！狼来了！”小白兔们就一起竞相钻山洞，一个洞只能钻一个人 ，最后有没有钻到洞的人，就要表演一个节目。就这样，第一组和第二组的'幼儿相互调换，游戏继续进行。
2老师带领幼儿进行游戏，并注意安全。
3游戏结束后，老师做活动总结。
跑步比赛教案(篇2)
活动目标
1、发展幼儿跑的能力，增强腿部力量。
2、培养幼儿团结合作的精神。
3、考验小朋友们的反应能力，锻炼他们的个人能力。
4、懂得遵守游戏规则，感受参加集体活动的乐趣。
5、能积极参加游戏活动，并学会自我保护。
活动准备
在场地上画好一条直线作起跑线和终点线
活动玩法
老师把幼儿分成两组，分别站在起点线后面，听信号，老师说：“跑”各组第一名幼儿
将开始跑，一直跑到终点线，然后各组第二名幼儿就接着跑，跑到终点线，就这样依次进行，、直到最后一名幼儿跑完，那一组幼儿最先跑完，就那一组为胜。
活动要求
跑的时候不可以跨出起跑线，不然作犯规。
注意事项
跑的时候注意安全，不要相互碰撞。
教学反思：
游戏是幼儿的生命，幼儿爱游戏，活动中，幼儿情绪很高，他们在生动、活泼、愉快的情绪中积极、主动地进行锻炼，充分体现了幼儿是活动的主体，活动量适中，是一节成功的游戏教学课。
跑步比赛教案(篇3)
中学游戏活动教学计划：竞赛教学计划
中班游戏活动跑步比赛教学计划主要包括活动目标，活动准备，活动游戏方法，活动要求，注意事项等内容，发展儿童的跑步能力，增强腿部力量，培养儿童的团结精神。合作，适合幼儿园老师。在中班的游戏活动课上，看一看运行游戏的教学计划。
活动目标
1.训练孩子跑步和增强腿部的能力。
2.培养儿童团结合作的精神。
三。测试孩子的反应能力，锻炼他们的个人能力。
4了解游戏规则，感受参与团体活动的乐趣。
5积极参加游戏活动，学会保护自己。
活动准备
在场地上画一条直线作为起点和终点
老师把孩子们分成两组，站在起跑线上听信号。老师说：“跑”每组的第一个孩子。
将开始运行，继续到终点线，然后每个组中的第二个子项运行并运行到终点线，然后按顺序进行直到最后一个子项用完，该组子项先运行，然后a组是一个优胜者。
活动要求
跑步时，您不能越过起跑线或犯规。
注意事项
跑步时要小心，不要互相碰撞。
跑步比赛教案(篇4)
活动目标
1.发展幼儿跑的能力，增强腿部力量。
2.培养幼儿团结合作的精神。
3.考验小朋友们的反应能力，锻炼他们的个人能力。
4.懂得遵守游戏规则，感受参加集体活动的乐趣。
5.能积极参加游戏活动，并学会自我保护。
活动准备
在场地上画好一条直线作起跑线和终点线
活动玩法
老师把幼儿分成两组，分别站在起点线后面，听信号，老师说：“跑”各组第一名幼儿
将开始跑，一直跑到终点线，然后各组第二名幼儿就接着跑，跑到终点线，就这样依次进行，直到最后一名幼儿跑完，那一组幼儿最先跑完，就那一组为胜。
活动要求
跑的时候不可以跨出起跑线，不然作犯规。
注意事项
跑的时候注意安全，不要相互碰撞。
跑步比赛教案(篇5)
小班游戏跑步比赛教案的反思
引言：
小班游戏是幼儿园教学重要的组成部分，通过游戏可以使幼儿获得快乐的体验，锻炼身体，培养团队合作精神。跑步比赛是一项适合小班级幼儿的游戏活动，可以培养幼儿的竞争意识和体能。本文就小班游戏跑步比赛教案进行反思，从教案制定、活动组织、教师角色和效果评估等方面进行详细分析。
一、教案制定
在制定小班游戏跑步比赛教案时，需要考虑幼儿的年龄特点和发展需求。幼儿在这个阶段注重亲近自然、喜欢动手动脑，因此教案应注重让幼儿体验跑步的快乐和自由感。在教案中应明确的安排跑步比赛的目标、步骤和规则，并根据幼儿的实际情况进行适当的调整。
二、活动组织
跑步比赛活动的组织需要考虑到幼儿的安全和参与程度。活动前，教师应组织幼儿进行必要的热身活动，并向幼儿解释比赛的规则和注意事项。比赛中，教师应做到有针对性地进行引导，鼓励幼儿参与比赛，保证比赛的秩序；并及时给予肯定和奖励，增强幼儿的自我认同感和成就感。
三、教师角色
在小班游戏跑步比赛中，教师的角色起到至关重要的作用。教师既是组织者，又是引导者，更是示范者。教师应具备沟通能力和组织能力，能够与幼儿有效地进行沟通和交流，并组织幼儿按规则参与比赛。同时，教师应注重示范，以身作则，激发幼儿的积极性和参与性。
四、效果评估
为了确保跑步比赛活动的效果，教师需对活动进行评估。评估可以从幼儿的参与程度、表现和进步等方面进行。教师可以观察幼儿在比赛中是否积极参与，是否能按照规则进行比赛；同时，教师也可以通过反馈问卷的形式了解幼儿的反馈和感受。通过评估，教师可以了解到活动的优点和不足，进一步完善教案和活动的组织。
结论：
小班游戏跑步比赛是一项有益于幼儿发展的活动，可以提高幼儿的体能和竞争意识，培养幼儿的团队合作精神。在教案制定时，需要根据幼儿的特点和需求进行有针对性的安排；在活动组织中，教师应注重安全和参与程度的把控；在教师角色中，教师应兼顾组织者、引导者和示范者的角色；在效果评估中，教师需对幼儿表现和活动的优缺点进行评估，以便进一步提高教案和活动的质量。通过反思和总结，我们可以为未来的教学活动积累经验并不断提升教学质量。
跑步比赛教案(篇6)
教学目标
1、发展幼儿跑的能力，增强腿部力量。
2、培养幼儿团结合作的精神。
教学准备
在场地上画好一条直线作起跑线和终点线
教学玩法
老师把幼儿分成两组，分别站在起点线后面，(教案出自：教案网)听信号，老师说：跑各组第一名幼儿
将开始跑，一直跑到终点线，然后各组第二名幼儿就接着跑，跑到终点线，就这样依次进行，直到最后一名幼儿跑完，那一组幼儿最先跑完，就那一组为胜。
教学要求
跑的时候不可以跨出起跑线，不然作犯规。
教学事项
跑的时候注意安全，不要相互碰撞。
小学英语教案
授课前，老师需要准备好教案，它是教学过程中必备的课件。每个老师都需要认真规划好自己的教案。教案对于课堂教学起着基础性的作用。我们为您整理了关于“小学英语教案”的相关资料，请根据您的判断权衡这些信息的利弊和可行性。
小学英语教案(篇1)
小学六年级英语教学计划篇一
指导思想：
本学期小学英语教科研工作将继续以国家《基础教育课程改革纲要(试行)》和《英语课程标准》为指导，转变教学观念，以课堂教学为阵地，深化教育改革。坚持面向基层学校，面向全体学生，切实抓好英语师资队伍建设，围绕提高教师素质、加强教学研究两个主题开展工作，结合我市小学英语课堂教学实际，为教师服务，为学生服务。进一步提高质量意识，抓住新课程改革的契机，创新教学策略，开创我市小学英语教研工作的崭新局面。
工作措施
一、理论学习与时俱进
1、精心组织理论学习，提高学习的针对性和实效性，主要围绕以下专题开展学习活动：
⑴《基础教育课程改革纲要》和《英语课程标准》(实验稿)。
⑵有关教学策略和教学评价的理论和经验。
2、继续鼓励教师撰写教育教学论文，从实践上升到理论。
二、常规管理常抓不放
1、组织新上岗英语教师学习常规，对照常规，搞好外语教学的每一环节。
重点要抓好课堂教学常规的落实，着眼于培养学生综合语言运用能力。通过创设合理的教学情景，引导学生在模拟或真实交际中理解、模仿和运用语言;要充分运用实物、图片、手势、直观教具和表演等方法，生动活泼地进行外语教学。本学期将继续组织体现这些导向作用的研究课和示范课，供大家观摩学习。总结经验，推广成果。2、抓好教研组建设。
英语教研组要在落实常规方面发挥重要作用。要做到每周坚持集体说课备课，发挥团队协作精神，用集体的智慧来促进自己的教学。抓好英语教师的“六认真”工作，英语课堂教学力求体现“新、精、活、实”的要求。教师优良课率达100%，优课率达60%以上。三、教学研究人人参与
1、加强英语学科课程改革课堂教学研讨，使英语教师人人明确基础
教育改革是以培养学生的实践能力和创新精神为重点，以学生学习方式转变为特征，以应用现代信息技术为标志，关注学生体验，感悟和实践过程，体现以学生发展为本的教学理念。
2、根据《英语课程标准》对小学英语学科发展的新要求，积极为教师创设接受继续教育的机会，不断加强小学英语教师队伍专业化建设的力度和效度，提高教师自身的专业素质和教学能力。
注重实效，抓好“青蓝工程”，发现苗子，培养尖子。积极指导青年教师参加小学英语优秀课竞赛和展示观摩活动。3、组织好教师培训活动。
通过说课、听课、评课、讲座、集体备课、教材分析等活动，让教师过好大纲关和教材关，尽快明确备课、上课的基本规范，适应小学英语的教学要求，不断提高自身的业务素质。4、充分发挥优秀教师的示范作用，组织优秀教师作理论讲座、上示范课、研究课。
创造机会让更多的青年教师脱颖而出。并争取在11月的英语老师基本功比赛中取得好成绩。5、全面提高教学质量。
毕业班英语全科合格率达98%以上，良好率达70%以上，优秀率达40%以上。非毕业班英语全科合格率达98%以上，良好率达70%以上，优秀率达40%以上。6、开展双语教学，加强英语教学与其它学科的整合。
在一年级实验班的数学双语教学实验的基础上，鼓励和要求非英语教师使用英语授课。电脑、自然、体育及艺术类教师要努力做到30%以上的课时使用英语教学。
四、开展课外活动，激发学习兴趣
课外活动是重要的教学辅助手段，有利于增长知识、开阔视野。有目的、有组织地开展各种适合学生语言水平和年龄特点的课外活动，可使学生生动、活泼、主动地学习，可以激发他们的学习热情，培养兴趣。我们准备根据不同年级掌握的知识水平，组织一些丰富多彩的课外活动。如：手抄报、对话表演、英语课本剧、英语能力竞赛等，组织评委认真评定，评出集体奖和个人奖，给予物质和精神奖励。给学生充分展示自我，认识自我的机会。
为了帮助学生创设英语语言环境，我们准备除了在课堂上用英语组织教学外，课外也引导学生用英语打招呼、对话。并开展“每日英语”的活动。开辟了学校的“紫藤架下”为英语角，利用学校电视台播放英语歌曲、营造良好的英语学习氛围，增加语言实践的广度和密度，培养学生交际运用英语的能力。计划在12月成功举办首届“英语节”。
工作安排：
一、做好“EverydayEnglish”的工作。
负责人：顾忆恩
二、英语早读规范化。
负责人：顾忆恩
三、做好“英语广播”的工作。
负责人：陈忠英
四、办好“英语角”。
负责人：沈旦萍
英语活动：
九月：三~六年级的“英语日常用语”比赛。
十月：三~六年级的“英语背颂”比赛。
十一月：四~六年级的“英语百词”竞赛。
小学六年级英语教学计划篇二一、指导思想
本学期我继续担任小学六年级的教学工作，本学期六年级是毕业班级，要紧紧围绕着本校的教学工作计划，结合本学期工作要点，全面落实认真贯彻落实教师的“备、教、批、辅、考”。全面提高教育教学质量，突出工作创新，开展切合实际的教学活动，提高课堂教学水平，促进自身发展，提升学生的综合素质，在本学期的小升初考试中，创出优异的成绩，因此特制定本学期的教学工作计划。
二、主要工作任务
1、认真学习“新课程理念”，了解新的教育教学资源查阅相关教学活动信息，上网多查阅以往小升初知识题型，因材施教，学习有效教学的理论知识和我所教的英语学科课程标准，写好自学笔记，并有一定的质量，在本学期认真上交高质量的教学论文、案例或教学反思。
2、端正态度、提高认识，了解新课程理念，以适应新课程理念下教学工作的需要，虚心向他人学习，取长补短，相互促进共同提高。
在本学期按学校要求听课18节以上，内容真实，并有一定质量的评语。积极参加本学期学校组织的各项培训，并写好记录，做好自学笔记，按时完成。3、认真理解掌握“备、教、批、辅、考”的基本要求。
三、英语教学工作
在本学期我担任六年级的英语教学。压力很大，面对小升初考试的六年级英语，面向全体学生，以学生的发展为宗旨，始终把激发学生的学习兴趣放在首位，注意分层教学，引导学生端正学习态度，掌握良好的学习方法，培养学生良好的学习习惯。本学期的英语教学，我从以下几个方面做起：
(一)教学目的任务
1、能按四会、三会的要求掌握所学单词。
2、能按四会要求掌握所学句型。3、能使用日常交际用语，活用四会句型，进行简单的交流，做到大胆开口，发音正确。4、能在图片、手势、情境等非语言提示的帮助下，听懂清晰的话语和录音。5、进一步养成良好的书写习惯。6、进一步养成听英语、读英语和说英语的良好习惯。7、能运用相关的语言知识和技能，完成某项任务。8、能演唱已学过的英语歌曲，已学过的歌谣。(二)教材重点难点
1、能按四会、三会的要求掌握所学单词。
2、能按四会要求掌握所学句型。3、能使用日常交际用语，活用四会句型，进行简单的交流，做到大胆开口，发音正确。4、能在图片、手势、情境等非语言提示的帮助下，听懂清晰的话语和录音。(三)主要措施
1、以活动为课堂教学的主要形式，设计丰富多彩的教学活动，让学生在乐中学、学中用，从而保证学生英语学习的可持续性发展。
2、通过听、说、读、写、唱、游、演、画、做等形式，进行大量的语言操练和练习。3、培养学生拼读音标的能力，确保学生自主学习的质量。4、设计全面、高效的课外作业，培养学生良好的书写习惯，做到整洁、规范、正确地书写。5、根据“备、教、批、辅、考”的基本要求，每堂课结束后进行检测，努力提高学生的英语成绩。毕业班的英语教学要全面进行，在新课结束后做好详细的复习计划，提高英语教学质量。四、加强学习提高素质
利用业务学习和业余时间学习先进的教育教学理念，不断反思和向名师学习，切实提高自身素质。
小学六年级英语教学计划篇三一、学生情况分析
六年级学生对英语学习兴趣整体有所下降，英语底子薄，两极分化比较严重。所以本学期应做好后进生的转化工作。教师应该面向全体学生，以学生的发展为宗旨，始终把激发学生的学习兴趣放在首位，注意分层教学，引导学生端正学习态度，掌握良好的学习方法，培养学生良好的学习习惯。
二、学期教学目标和奋斗目标
1、形成学习英语的兴趣和爱好，形成在动态真实的环境中使用英语进行活动的积极性。
2、能运用英语在日常学校生活和课堂情景中与老师和同学进行的日常口头交际，如问候有关个人、家庭和朋友的简单信息。
3、能参加运用英语组织和开展日常课堂教学和生活游戏及其他课内外活动。
4、能听懂指令并作成适当的反应，能读懂配图小故事，能根据图片进行简要的口头描述，能唱教过的英语歌曲，并诵读一些英语诗歌和歌谣。
5、乐于了解英语国家儿童的兴趣和爱好及外国人的风俗习惯。
6、进一步养成良好的书写习惯。
7、进一步养成听英语、读英语和说英语的良好习惯。
本学期我预计使本班学生的及格率达到90%，优秀率达到50%，居全开发区前二名。
三、教材重点、难点
1、能按四会、三会的要求掌握所学单词。
2、能按四会要求掌握所学句型。
3、能使用日常交际用语，活用四会句型，进行简单的交流，做到大胆开口，发音正确。
4、能在图片、手势、情境等非语言提示的帮助下，听懂清晰的话语和录音。
四、主要措施
1、在教学过程中，采用情景教学法，让学生身临其境，积极主动地参与到课堂教学中去，调动学生的非智力因素，提高学生实际运用语言的能力。
2、通过听、说、读、写、唱、游、演、画、做等形式，进行大量的语言操练和练习。
3、以活动为课堂教学的主要形式，设计丰富多彩的教学活动，让学生在乐中学、学中用，从而保证学生英语学习的可持续性发展。
4、培养学生拼读音标的能力，确保学生自主学习的质量。
5、设计全面、高效的课外作业，培养学生良好的书写习惯，做到整洁、规范、正确地书写。
总之，要做的工作还很多，无论如何，我会尽职尽责的努力教好英语;刻苦钻研教材、教法，努力争当英语教学的“排头兵”。不辜负领导、家长、学生的期望。
小学英语教案(篇2)
一、教学目标与要求
1、知识与能力目标
⑴学生会谈论学习成绩和表现等。
⑵认读单词：quite, good at, say, try, fast.
⑶初步认读句子：she’s good at…
she’s quite good at…
she tries hard at…
she doesn’t work hard at…
2、情感态度目标
通过学生的自我评价，以及互相评价，给每一位学生找到自己的优点，树立其自信心，提高学习热情和主动性。
二、教学重点及难点
⑴重点：掌握新单词，了解新句型，在此基础上理解课文内容。并能简单的利用句型描述他人各个科目的成绩。
⑵难点：try的第三人称单数；quite和quiet的区别。
三、课前准备
本课单词卡片，vcd。
a)教学过程
step 1 warm up
i.review the adjective words with the cards.
ii.free talk:
s1: i’m very naughty. but i’m very clever.
t: is s1 naugty in class?
ss: yes, he is.
t：is he quiet?
ss: no, he isn’t.
step 2 presentation and practice
1.出示一张成绩单，数学是100分。
t：this student is very good at maths.
板书good at.帮助学生理解意思。
2．t: are you good at maths?
s1: yes, i am.
s2: no, i’m not.
3. t: how about lingling? is she good at maths? let’s watch the video.
play the video and have the students answer the question.
t: is she good at maths?
ss: yes, she is. she is good at maths.
d)t: look at your paper. what about her english? what about her science? now let’s listen to the radio and finish the report.
教师发给学生一份表格，引导学生通过挺对话，把表格中的信息补充完整。
report: lingling
maths: very good
english: _______
science: _______
pe: run fast
art: _________
chinese: very good
e)t: how about lingling’s english?
ss: quite good.
(帮助学生区分quiet quite两个词)
f)t：is she goot at science?
ss: no, she isn’t.
t: she tries hard at science.
板书try tries
g)help the students finish the report. then play the vcd, and have the students repeat the text.
h)group work: have some students retell lingling’s report.
9. do the practice2 on page 24. look at the report of sam. retell sam’s report in pairs.
step 3 consolidation and extension
1.have the students do the exercise1 in activity book unit 2.
first, listen to the tape, say the subjects.
second, finish the report.
third, ask and answer.
2．do a super interview.访问自己的一个朋友，完成手中的报告。注意第三人称单数。然后汇报自己的结果。运用重点句型：
she’s good at…
she’s quite good at…
she tries hard at…
she doesn’t work hard at…
step 4 summary
1. t：what have you learned in this lesson?
ss: ……
2. read the key words and key sentences together.
step 5 homework
三、listen and repeat the text for 5 times.
四、write the new words and sentences for 2 lines.
五、talk about your friend with your parents.
step 6 blackboard design
module 6 unit 2 she’s quite good at english.
she’s good at…
she’s quite good at…
she tries hard at…
she doesn’t work hard at…
小学英语教案(篇3)
一、教学内容与分析
1、letsquo;s learn
本部分将继续学习有关学校及学习用品的词汇：school, bag, book, pencil-case, sharpener.
2、letsquo;s do
本部分主要让学生听懂一些简单的指示语，并按照指令做出相应的动作。通过听听做做的活动，让学生练习并运用所学的词汇。
二、课前准备
教师自备与本课教学有关的文具(实物)和教师卡片。
三、教学步骤
1、热身/复习(warm-up/revision)
(1)“开火车”：学生一个接一个进行口语问答，要求又快又好。
(2)通过图片和单词卡片复习学过的单词crayon, ruler, eraser, pen, pencil. (可通过做touching game或matching game来复习)
2、新课展示 (presentation)
(1)letsquo;s learn
a、通过实物教pencil-case, bag, book, sharpener, 用图片教school.
在教“铅笔袋”pencil-case时，出示“铅笔盒”pencil-bo, 并说明它们的区别，即：用软皮或塑料制成的通常称为pencil-case, 用铁等较坚硬材料制成的叫做pencil-bo. 同时教pencil-bo.
b、新单词的教学也可通过旧单词来引出。如：pencil 到pencil-case.
(2)、letsquo;s do
教师边做打开书的动作边说open the book. 然后边做合上书的动作边说close the book. (重复两次)。再拿起铅笔袋，做打开、合上的动作，并说：open the pencil-case. close the pencil-case. 请学生说出open, close的意思。 用同样的方法教show me your sharpener. carry the bag. 等句子。
3、趣味操练(practice)
(1)、让学生将所有学过的文具全部摆在桌上。教师说：“show me your book.” ，学生须快速举起并大声说：“book”.
(2)、游戏：画文具。
(3)、在本课教学中，教师也可以采用 “选词竞赛”的游戏。
(4)、通过游戏simon says练习以show, open, close, put, carry 所引导的祈使句。
4、课堂评价(assessment)
做活动手册本单元第5部分练习。学生根据录音，圈出所听到的文具。(1)、学生看图，用英语说出图中每样文具物品。(2)、教师讲解题目的意思并指导做的方法。(3)学生听录音做练习。(4)、核对答案.
5课外活动(add-activities)
(1)、要求学生听本课所学内容的录音，跟读单词和句子，并在实际生活中自然运用。
(2)、将学习用具逐个用英语说给家人听。
第三课时
一、教学内容与分析
1、letsquo;s check
本部分通过听力练习，检查学生对本课所学内容掌握的情况。
2、letsquo;s chant
本部分通过有节奏、有韵律的歌谣，让学生进一步复习和巩固本单元所学的词汇。
二、课前准备
准备一个装有本单元所学的文具的书包，与本课教学内容相关的词卡和图片。
三、教学步骤
1、热身/复习(warm-up/revision)
(1)、唱”hello”歌。
(2)、通过实物和单词卡复习有关文具。
(3)、用show me your… 请学生将他们的文具摆出来。
(4)、用游戏simon says复习第8页所学的指令性的动作。
2、新课展示(presentation)
教师从自己准备的书包中拿出一本书，并指着自己说：i have a book. 随后再掏出笔袋，对学生说：i have a pencil-case. 再从笔袋里拿出一支铅笔说：i have a pencil. 拿 出一把尺子说：i have a ruler. 等等。待学生熟悉了i have a … 是“我有一个…“后，请学生们用自己的文具来说：i have a … 告诉学生如果你有与别人东西相同时，可说me too!
3、趣味操练 (practice)
(1)、操练letsquo;s chant
a、全班听录音，边听录音边拍手有节奏的吟唱letsquo;s chant 部分的内容。
b、将全班分成两大组。第一组举起铅笔齐读i have a pencil.第二组齐读me too!并拍手。读第二句时两组交换，以此类推。
c、待学生读熟后，可让他们自由发挥，用其他文具替换书上的几种，并在小组内朗读。
(2)听力练习：letsquo;s check
根据听到的句子，让学生圈出相应的图a或图b。
4、课堂评价 (assessment)
做活动手本单元第6部分练习。此项练习旨训练学生的观察和反应能力。
5、课外活动(add-activities)
让学生听录音，跟读a、b部分letsquo;s do和letsquo;s chant的内容，边读边做出相应的动作。
小学英语教案(篇4)
一、教学内容
1．字母 a～g。
2．句型：初步理解以下句型：1）what’s your name？ 2）my name is…
3．日常交际用语：打招呼用语（greetings）：1）hello！ 2）good morning． 3）nice to meet you！
教具
录音机；姓名卡片一张（上面写着教师自己姓名的汉语拼音）；字母卡片a～g（含大、小写）；字母组合卡片（part 3）；划有四线格的小黑板（为教字母的书写准备）。
二、重难点
掌握a，b，c，e，d，f，g的读音、书写；运用简单的问候语进行日常交际活动。
三、课堂教学设计
step 1 presentation (10 mins)
1．教师用英语说：now class begins．然后借助手势让学生起立，用英语向学生问好。
t：good morning，class！
s：good morning，teacher！
然后用英语说：sit down，please．并同时做出请学生坐下的手势。
教师向学生解释 good morning的意思，并告诉学生下午好应说“good afternoon”。用手势介绍teacher和class这两个词，然后要全班用相同的语句来应答。
t：good morning，class！
ss：good morning，teacher！
t：good afternoon，class!
ss：good afternoon，teacher！
反复训练几次，直到学生练熟为止。教师可以反复重复：stand up．及sit down，please．等用语，让学生们做出相应的动作，直到确信学生已经能听懂为止。
2．教师告诉全班学生：we’re going to learn lesson one today．并用中文（今天我们学习第1课）重说一遍，让学生听懂即可，并板书lesson one在黑板上。教师拿出事先准备好的写有自己姓名的汉语拼音卡片，指着自己，对学生说：my name is×××．
重复几遍后，问一位学生：what’s your name？ 如果学生仍不明白，可反复借助手势，引导学生答出他／她的名字。
3．播放对话演示录像（见媒体素材视频类：对话演示lesson 1 part 1）
4．让学生看lesson one中的两张图，教师可对图中人物及对话做些解释，也可请学生描述在图中能看到什么人，这些人在干什么。放录音，第一遍学生只听不读，从第2遍起跟读，反复几次，并要求学生认真模仿。
5．播放part 1的课文对话跟读（powerpoint文件）中的lesson 1的音频（见媒体素材课文对话跟读），让学生反复跟读。
step 2 drill (6 mins)
l．教师说 i’m your teacher（请自己并解释）领读teacher词。
2．师生对话，操练数遍。
t: good morning, class.
s: good morning, teacher.
3．先让一学生上讲台当教师向全班问候，然后让几个学生分别当教师进行操练。
s: good morning, class!
c: good morning, teacher!
step 3 practice（8 mins）
1．将全班分为两人一组，仿照图中对话，进行练习。数分钟后，请几组同学到前面演示。教师从第一节课起，就要鼓励学生敢于表演，表演时声音洪亮，并一定要伴有动作（如本课中招手、握手等），以增强交际效果。
2．播放动画：greeting（见媒体素材日常交际用语：greeting），先整个观看动画一遍，然后教师把声音关闭，让学生根据场景模仿动画。
step 4 presentation（10 mins）
1．教师拿出a～g的英语字母卡片，教学生认读字母。在出示字母卡片时，应按字母表顺序。并说明英语字母有大、小写之分。教字母读音时，要求学生认真观察教师口型变化，仔细模仿。
2．放字母的录音，可反复播放几次。先是由学生集体跟读，在学生有一定实践的基础上，叫几行学生依次朗读。从一开始就要把字母朗读的两种语调教给学生，即升调和降调。对于在开始阶段学生出现的一些读音上的失误，如果误差不大，可先不予逐一纠正，表扬发音好的学生，鼓励其他学生也积极模仿。在本课字母中，c、f、g这3个字母的读音，教师在教学时，放慢速度，多做示范；必要时，可走到教室中间或后面，以使坐在后面的同学看得清，听得真，有利于模仿。
3．播放动画：学字母（见媒体素材：学字母），更形象地教学字母a—g，同时可以吸引学生的注意力。
4．拿出事先准备好的划有四线格的小黑板，教师在小黑板上逐一示范a～g这些字母的大、小写格式、笔顺，以及各个字母在四线格中所占的位置。并简要告诉学生英语字母有书写体和印刷体之分，要求学生依照书写体的示范去书写字母。
5．让学生拿出练习本抄写，要求学生书写工整。并按笔顺仿写。教师检查，及时纠正学生在书写英语字母时出现的笔顺、格式处理不当的错误。
step 5 consolidation （5 mins）
1．拿出事先准备好的字母组合卡片，让学生读 part 3中的字母：cd bc ad cba caac abc bbc cbc ba等。可以放录音让学生跟读。
2．听写a－g大小写，可以按顺序念。
3．要2名同学师将课文第一部分对话练习一遍。
step 6 workbook ( 5 mins)
1．先全班做ex. l，ex. 4，然后个别学生认读，教师纠正其发音。
2．听写字母，不按顺序单独中听写字母。
step 7 homework
1．听录音带，并跟读本课所学的日常用语；反复操练part 1的对话，并能背诵。
2．书面做ex. 2，ex. 3
四、交际用语讲解
1．good morning，class！同学们，早上好！
句中class是教师对全班同学的称呼。类似的表达法还有：boys and girls；everyone等。例如：
hello，everyone！同学们好！
please repeat after me，boys and girls．同学们请跟我读。
2．good morning，teacher！老师，早上好！
good morning．早安！／早上好！
这是西方人在上午见面时打招呼的用语。一般从早晨到中午均可使用。其应答用语相同。例如：
a：good morning！
b：good morning！
有时在熟人之间可略作：morning！
注意，在英语中“王老师”，“李老师”等不可称为：teacher wang；teacher li. 这是因为teacher一词不能放在姓氏前作称呼语。如果是男老师，可称为：mr. wang或mr. li，如果是女老师，可称为：ms wang或ms li。但good morning，teacher！（老师，早上好！）这个句子还是可以接受的。
小学英语教案(篇5)
怎样设计小学英语教案
小学英语的教学现状是周课时较少，授课班级较多，学生数量较大，每学期教学容量较多，在此情况下，要想让英语课堂像磁石一般牢牢地吸引学生，就必须充分设计好每一节课的教案。
一、教案的定义
关于教案，这是个老生常谈的问题。对于我们每个人来说，并不陌生。教案，也称课时计划，是教师经过备课，以课时为单位设计的具体教学方案，教案是上课的重要依据，通常包括：教学目的、重难点、教法和学法、教学过程、小结、反思等。
教学是一种创造性劳动。教案是教师的教学设计和设想 ，写一份优秀教案是设计者教育思想、智慧、动机、经验、个性和教学艺术性的综合体现。
二、小学英语教案应遵循的原则
针对小学英语学科，我认为在写教案时，应遵循以下原则：
1、科学性
就是要认真贯彻《英语课程标准标》，按教材内在规律，结合学生实际来确定教学目标、教学重点、难点。在设计教学过程，避免出现知识性错误。
2、创新性
从课本内容变成胸中有案，再落到纸上，形成书面教案，继而到课堂实际讲授，关键在于要能 ”学百家，树一宗”。在自己钻研教材的基础上，广泛地涉猎多种教参，向有经验的老师请教．要汲取精华，要经过一番思考——消化，吸收，然后结合个人教学体会，巧妙构思，精心安排，写出属于自己的教案。
3、可操作性
在写教案时，一定从实际出发，因为教学工作是一项创造性的工作，写教案不能千篇一律，所以老师的教案要结合自己所执教班级特点，因材施教，做到真正意义上的可操作。
4、差异性
由于我们教学面对的是一个个活生生的有思维能力的学生，又由于每个人的思维能力不同，对问题的理解程度不同，因此教师不能死扣教案，把学生的思维积极性压下去。要根据学生的实际改变原先的教学计划和方法，针对出现的疑点积极引导。
当在教学过程中，出现打乱教案现象时，也不用紧张。因为事实上，英语教学目标是在教学的一定过程中逐步完成的，一旦出现偏离现象，可以在整个教学进度中去调整。
三、小学英语教案设计的主要步骤
下面，说一下有关小学英语教案设计的主要步骤
· 教学开始前：分析教学因素；确定教学目标；
设计教学过程；通读调整完善
· 教学过程中：及时动态应变
· 教学结束后：审总结修订
四、小学英语教案模式具体包括以下十项：
1．课题（说明本课名称）
2．教学目的（说明本课所要完成的教学任务）
3．课型（说明属新授课，还是复习课）
4．课时（说明属第几课时）
5．教具（说明辅助教学手段使用的工具）
6．教学重点（说明本课所必须解决的关键性问题）
7．教学难点（说明本课的学习时易产生困难和障碍的知识点）
8．教学过程（或称课堂结构，说明教学进行的内容、方法步骤）
9．作业处理（说明如何布置书面或口头作业）
10．板书设计（说明上课时准备写在黑板上的内容）
在教案书写过程中，教学过程是关键，它包括以下几个步骤：
（一）导入新课
1．设计要新颖活泼，精当概括。
2．怎样进行导入，复习那些内容？
3．提问哪些学生，需用多少时间等。
（二）讲授新课
1．针对不同教学内容，选择不同的教学方法。
2．怎样提出问题，如何逐步启发、诱导？
3．教师怎么教学生怎么学？详细步骤安排，需用时间。
（三）巩固练习
1．练习设计精巧，有层次、有坡度、有密度。
2．怎样进行练习， 需要多少时间？
（四）归纳小结
1．怎样进行，是教师还是学生归纳？
2．需用多少时间？
（五）作业安排
1．布置那些内容，要考虑知识拓展性、能力性。
2．需不需要提示或解释？
（六）课后反思
· 教学目标是否达到？
· 教学过程是否合理？
· 教学效果是否理想？
· 教案中有哪些成功之处？
· 教案还存在哪些不足？
· 以后的教案如何设计？
如果按照模式来写教案并不难，可是“教学有法，但无定法，贵在得法。”有的教师从教许多年，教案也写得详细认真，但教学成绩却不尽人意。有的教师教案书写较简单，教学环节也体现得不齐，但教学效果却很优秀。
是不是这些教师就没有重难点，没有教学方法，没有情感目标呢？答案是否定的。因为教案已写在了心里，非常清楚这节课要达到什么目的，要让学生学到什么、体验到什么。所以，我认为教学效果好，受学生欢迎的教师未必要苛刻其教案写得怎样，而教学效果不理想的教师，就一定要写祥案，特别是上没有执教过年级的英语课，一定要写出祥案。
五、小学英语教案备课模式
接下来，具体谈谈小学英语教案备课模式：
备学情━━备教材━━备预习环节━━备展示、巩固环节━━备反馈环节━━备时间分配━━教学反思
下面，一一展开来说：
1、备学情
课堂教学总是面对具体的学生进行，只有真正了解学生，了解学生之间存在的共性与异性, 我们才能有的放矢的进行备课、上课。
2、备教材
（1）.备学习内容：在通读教材的基础上根据教学大纲的要求对教材进行深入的思考，仔细的推敲，把握本课的知识点、提炼出重难点，同时，将要延伸的知识和拓展的内容要做到心中有数。
（2）.备学习目标：根据教学大纲的要求及学生特点确定出本节课学习要完成的任务，如基础知识、重点难点、拓展的内容、学生个人的能力的生成等。
（3）.备教具：做好充分的课前准备工作，如教具的准备、多媒体课件的制作和教室学习情境的布置。
3、备预习环节
小学英语的预习主要是课内预习，教师把本课的学习内容通过形象生动的方式，如：设置情景、编造对话、观看图片、影像资料等巧设悬念给学生一启发,把思考的空间留给学生，同时把预习任务交给学生，可以通过小组讨论、翻阅资料等形式学习逐渐培养学生的独立与合作学习习惯。
4、备展示、巩固环节、
小学英语课的重点就是“词”的“读法、用法、写法”。 备课时要具体体现出活动内容的具体安排、及每个活动所用的时间，以免学生一盘散沙。
比如在“单词”的用法方面，运用“任务型“教学法可以这样组织教学：
A组任务，写出或说出与其字母组合相同的词，越多越好。
B组任务，用这个词造句、编对话。
C组任务，通过添减字母将这个单词变形。
这样把任务分配到各小组，一定时间后，各小组来互评。然后小组交换任务。在活动过程中可能会出现各种问题，如发音错误，中国式英语，句子出现语法错误等。对此我们要及时给予关注，起到指导作用。
5、备反馈环节
（1）、学生活动过程中老师巡视的时候可以解决反馈中差生的问题。
（2）、检测形式可多样：书面检测；口头检测等。方法要灵活：老师测试学生，学生之间相互测试等。
（3）、检测内容要有层次性，目的让不同层次的学生都有收获。
6、备时间的安排根据知识结构合理分配时间。
7、教学反思
教师的反思应贯穿备课的始终，随时对出现的问题反思、修正
九年级英语教案
想要更全面地了解“九年级英语教案”的相关知识不妨来看看这篇文章，我相信这项服务很快适应您的需求。在给学生上课之前，老师应该早早准备好教案和课件，因此最好能认真编写每个教案和课件。教案和课件是为了提高中小学教育教学质量和水平而提供的必要工具。
九年级英语教案 篇1
学习目标
1.谈论自己过去喜欢的事情。
2.掌握下列知识点：
■重点词汇：hate，candy，chew，gum
■重点短语：①walk to school ②on the soccer team ③all the time
④worry about ⑤chew gum
■重点句型：
We have to take the bus to schoo1.
■语法：反意疑问句
预习导学
Ⅰ.英汉短语互译。
1.步行去上学
2.chew gum
3.一直;总是
4.nt he soccer team
Ⅱ.预习Section Bla,1b,写出你小时候喜欢的事情。
5.I used to like
6.I used to
7.I used
合作研讨
一、重点单词与短语
1.hateu.讨厌;恨;不喜欢
例如：I used to hate music class.我过去讨厌音乐课。
【拓展】hate后跟名词、代词、动名词或不定式作宾语,同义词为dislike，反义词like。
【跟踪训练】
(1)他不喜欢在晚上开车
He hatesat night.
2.chew.嚼;咀嚼
【跟踪训练】
(2)吃饭要细嚼慢咽。
You mustyour food well before you swallow it.
3.worry about担心;焦虑
【拓展】与be worried about同义
【跟踪训练】
(3)不要担心她。
Don'ther.
二、重点句型与语法
■句型
We have to take the bus to schoo1.
我们不得不乘公共汽车去上学。
【精解】①have to意为“必须;不得不”，后跟动词原形。
【辨析】have to/must
have to具有客观性，不以人的主观意志为转移;而must强调主观性。have to可以用于各种时态，而must则不能。
【跟踪训练】
(4)他不得不早起赶早班车。
Heget up early to catch the early bus。
(5)我们必须学好英语。
Welearn English.
【精解】②take the bus意为“乘公共汽车”,“take+the+交通工具”，相当于“by+交通工具”。
【跟踪训练】
(6) go to school by bus every day.(同义句转换)
I to schoo1 every day.
■语法
反意疑问句
反意疑问句，表示说话人提出某种情况或建议，询问对方是否同意。
(1)反意疑问句的结构
反意疑问句是由“陈述句+反意疑问部分”构成，其反意疑问部分的结构是：be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语。否定形式要用缩略形式。
①主句为肯定陈述句，反意疑问部分为否定形式，即“前肯后否”式。
【跟踪训练】
(7)You are a student,
②主句为否定陈述句，反意疑问部分为肯定形式，即“前否后肯”式。
【跟踪训练】
(8)He hasn't finished his homework，
(2)反意疑问部分的主语和谓语的确定
①反意疑问部分的主语用代词而不用名词。
【跟踪训练】
(9)My brother likes playing basketball,
②陈述句中含有否定意义的词，如little，few, never ,hardly，nothing，nobody等，其反意疑问部分用肯定形式。
【跟踪训练】
(10)He knows little English，
③陈述句是“there be”结构时，其反意疑问部分用“be+there。
【跟踪训练】
(11)There is a post office near the school,
④以Let's开头的祈使句，反意疑问部分为shall we;以Let us开头的祈使句，反意疑问部分为will you;主句为祈使句，反意疑问部分为will you。
【跟踪训练】
(12)Let's go home，
(13)Don't be late again，
⑤陈述句中含有情态动词must时，若must表示“必须”时，反意疑问部分用needn't。若must表示推测“一定;想必”之意时，其反意疑问部分的动词应根据must后面的动词来确定。
【跟踪训练】
(14)We must work hard，
(15)She must have finished her homework,
⑥当陈述句为含有宾语从句的主从复合句时，反意疑问部分的动词和主语通常与主句的动词和主语保持一致。若主句的主语是第一人称I/we，其谓语动词又是think，sup-pose，believe，imagine等，则反意疑问部分的主语和动词应与从句的主语和动词保持一致。
【跟踪训练】
(16)Tom said that he would visit China next month，
(17)I think she can solve the problem，
(3)反意疑问句的答语
应根据具体的语言环境确定用肯定回答或否定回答，即根据事实回答。对“前否后肯”式的反意疑问句的回答要注意其回答形式要一致，即肯定用Yes，后面的部分用肯定形式，Yes译为“不”;否定用No，后面的部分用否定形式，No意为“是的”。
【跟踪训练】
(18)—Your father isn't a doctor, is he -(不,他是).
当党检测
Ⅰ.根据句意及首字母或汉语提示完成单词
1.I used to cgum a lot. What about you
2.一Do you like(糖果) 一No，I don't.
3.Some students usually go to school on(步行).
4.She used to(讨厌)gym class.
5.He is a basketball P.
Ⅱ.根据汉语提示完成句子
6.I don't (担心)tests.
7.Li Lei often (乘公共汽车)to school.
8.She (不得不)look after her little brother because her mother isn't at home.
九年级英语教案 篇2
《英语课程标准—英语》强调基于语言习得的教学环境的研究成果，课堂中师生和生生的互动和交际有助于学生运用语言，学生在完成任务的过程中产生语言的习得，并最终达到掌握语言的目的。但现实往往会有些偏差。因为初三课堂复习任务重时间紧，很多时候的课堂还是教师讲，学生记的填鸭式教学，课堂气氛沉闷，学生的学习激情不够。课堂效果可想而知。因此，笔者针对初中学生的年龄特征和教学内容，以学生为主体，在课堂教学上创设了各种情景，目的是让学生意识到，学习语言是为了进行交际，语言是一种交际的工具、手段，是生活的一部分，激发了学生学习英语的兴趣，调动了他们的学习积极性，并运用各种手段，培养了他们的语言交际能力。
(一)音乐渲染导入，情境油然而生。
在课前2-4分钟播放优美动听的经典英文歌曲或熟悉的音乐，一方面，可以使学生安静下来，对学生起到心理放松的作用，能使学生迅速进入角色;另一方面，可以有效用来导入新课，特别对于上午第四节课或下午的课更有效。例如，在处理新目标英语九年级Unit 6 I like music that I can dance to ， Period One 时教师就进行了音乐情境的创设。在上课铃响之前2分钟左右教师走进教室，播放理查德的钢琴曲《致爱丽丝》，同学们一听到那么美妙的声音马上都安静了下来，坐在位置上静静地欣赏。马上铃声响起，同学们好似没回过神来，教师也没有再刻意地说“上课起立”，而是
问同学T： Do you like the piece of music? How do you like it? Why do you like it?
有学生大声地说S1： Yes， I like it very much. Its beautiful，. Its gentle and quiet.
但也有同学说S2： No， Im afraid I dont like it.
T： So what kind of music do you like?
S2： I like pop music. T： Just like this kind.
教师顺势又播放了周杰伦的稻香。S2： Yes， that’s it. T： Ok， I know. You like music that is popular. (Repeat it to present.) But why do you like this kind of music?
S2： Because I like the singer.
T： Oh? Why?
S2： He is different from other singers. He can write songs for himself.
T： Yeah. So the lyrics is nice. It sounds great.
S2： Yes， yes.
T： So you like music that has great lyrics. And you like the singer who writes his own songs.
教师一边复述一边板书，并把定语从句部分用红色表示，再一次问学生他喜欢的音乐时，学生已经能够套用我的板书回答了。就这样在音乐的渲染中，教师很自然地呈现了第一课时的重难点，即一个定语从句子I like music that I can dance to;和不同种类音乐的表述：the music that has great lyrics; the music that isnt too loud; the music that can sing along with; the music that I can dance to ， etc.正是因为音乐渲染带来的`真实的情境，此时的新的知识点对学生来说再也不是抽象的冷冰冰的东西，而变成了大家都能感受得到的立体的活生生的东西，便于学生接受记忆。又如在新目标初三whatever 的学习中，我就教学生歌曲“My heart will go on”中的高潮部分---Wherever you go， whatever you do， Ill be right here waiting for you .然后再因势利导，发散学生的思维，又教了wherever， whoever， however， whenever等单词。此时，同学们情绪高涨，兴致勃勃，教学就在歌声中开始，歌声中进行，快乐而且有效。
(二)选择真实事例，情境自然而成。
学生通常喜欢谈论真实事例。因此，教师设计活动所选择的场景应该贴近学生的生活。
例如教师在复习初三Unit1---Unit3时，就用了班级中的真实事例。班级中的小高，全面发展且英语尤为突出，被邀请去给其他同学做报告，接受其他同学的提问。教师就把此节复习课创设成了“答同学问”现场，由同学提问，小高根据自己的实际情况回答。于是同学们纷纷落实行动。
S1： Excuse me. How do you study for English? Gao： I usually study English by making flashcards， but sometimes I study it by listening to tapes.
S2： Did you use to be good at English? G： Of course not. I used to be afraid of English. But later I found reading aloud was helpful. And I began to read every morning.
S3： Do you think teenagers should be allowed to work in groups?
G： I believe we can learn a lot from each other， but sometimes we get noisy.给出一个例子之后，便于课堂操控，再把学生分成4——6人小组，各自对自己小组里的优秀同学进行提问。在问答之间，同学们不但落实了三个单元的基本句型、语法结构和常用表达;还把三个独立的部分用优秀学生学习过程这个纽带紧密地连接在一起，使原本零散的知识点汇聚在一起构成了知识的网络。既活跃了课堂的氛围，又很形象地把知识上升到了系统的高度，最终便于学生的长久记忆。
(三)角色扮演，在情境中身临其境。
在英语课堂上，进行角色扮演，是老师常用的，也是学生很喜欢的一种方式。在角色扮演中，几乎所有的学生都能参与其中，积极主动地进行学习。我这里所说的角色扮演，并不是单纯的把书上的内容表演出来，同时也包括故事的`扩展，对话的重组，对课文的重新理解等等。如对Unit 8 Ill help clean up the city parks.的教学， 教师一上课就给学生创设了角色扮演的情境。
"Look at these pictures， what can you do?"
"You can help them with their homework. So are you a teacher?
NO， you are a volunteer. As a volunteer， what else can you do?"
给学生一个志愿者角色之后，再问学生作为一名志愿者还可以作那些力所能及的事情。再这样的情境中就完成了第一课时的教学重点：
Clean up the city park;
Help homeless people;
Cheer them up ;
Give out food at the food bank， etc.
同时也为第二课时第77中学的志愿者活动作了铺垫。
(四)在日常的交际中不知不觉入“境”
初三英语词汇的听写也是课堂有待突破的“瓶颈”。笔者作了如下尝试让学生入“境”来进行突破。即把一的单元的词汇编成一个具体的故事，创设出特定的情境，用交际的'形式进行听写。以Unit 14 单元为例。暑假的某一天，我们决定到海南去旅游。我们先列举了要带的物品，有游泳时穿的 bathing suit，擦洗的towels ，看路用的guidebook 及一些食物。走之前我特意去看看爷爷。他老人家又跟我聊起了他的过去。他说他以前常常要做好多家务：如先chop wood ，light the fire for breakfast 烧饭，到 collect the water from the village well 取水，喂养在on the farm 的动物等等。和爷爷吃了中饭，期间看了一则娱乐采访节目。说的是一个乐队，名叫the New Ocean Waves ，在两年前公开appear ，出现在舞台上不久就出了轰动一时的make a hit CD ，乐队的lead singer 还会写 poems ，经常在诗中提到他的homeland——四川，他说他的root 在那里;他的ancestor 在那里，虽然现在他身在 overseas ，我坚决地strongly believe他是个好人。总于到了出发的那一天，走之前我给花 water the flowers， 爸爸把车放到put the car into the garage，姐姐 整理了clean out the refrigerator ，妈妈把所有要带的放到pack the suitcase 。 我们都 look forward to 度过一个有意义的假期。
九年级英语教案 篇3
学习目标
1.通过学习短文，掌握如何处理我们在学习、生活中遇到的问题和挑战。
2.掌握下列知识点：
■重点词汇：soft，unless，solve，regard，influence，friendship，lose，development
■重点短语：①look up ②write down ③make up ④deal with
⑤regard as ⑥be angry with ⑦go by ⑧as a second language
■重点句型：
①If you don't know how to spell new words，look them up in a dictionary.
②As young adults，it is our duty to try our best to deal with each challenge in our education with the help of our teachers.
预习导学
Ⅰ.预习单词，完成下列各词。
1.unfair(反义词)________ 2.friend(形容词________ 3.easy(副词)
4.important(反义词________ 5.agreement(反义词
Ⅱ.预习Reading部分，回答下列问题。
6.How do we deal with our problems
合作研讨
一、重点单词与短语
1.unless conj.如果不;除非
例如：l won't go to the party unless I am invited.
除非我受到邀请，否则我不会去参加晚会的。
【拓展】unless 作连词，引导条件状语从句，含有否定意义，相当于if...not...
【跟踪训练】
(1)You will fail the exam unless you work harder.(同义句转换)
You will fail the exam the exam ________ you ________ work harder.
2.regardv.将……视为
【拓展】regard...as...意为“把……当作……”，后接名词或形容词。
【跟踪训练】
(2)我们把老师当作的朋友。
We ________ our teachers ________ our best friends.
3.deal with处理;应对
例如：How do you deal with your challenges in your study
你如何处理学习中的挑战
【辨析】deal with/do with
deal with的同义短语为do with，意为“处理”。deal with与how连用;do with与what连用。
【跟踪训练】
例如：How do we deal with our problems(同义句转换)
Do we ________ ________ our problems
二、重点句型
1.If you don't know how to spell new words，look them up in a dictionary.
如果你不知道如何拼写生词，查一下词典。
【精解】①证引导条件状语从句，主句是一般将来时、祈使句或含有情态动词can、may等时，从句要用一般现在时。
【跟踪训练】
(4)如果明天下雨我就不去公园了。
I go to the park if it tomorrow.
【精解】②look up“动词+副词”短语，意为“查阅;查找”，若名词作宾语，可以置于副词叩之前或之后;若代词作宾语，只能置于look叩中间。例如：look the new words up=look up the new words查阅生词;look it/them up查阅。
【辨析】look up/look at
Look at“动词+介词”型短语，意为“看……”，名词或代词作宾语时，只能置于介词之后，而不能置于短语中间。
【跟踪训练】
(5)—His telephone number is 701-5538 —Have you
A. Written it down B. written down it C .written them down D. written down them
2.As young adults，“is our duty to try our best to deal with each challenge in
our education with the help of our teachers.
作为年轻人，在老师的帮助下尽努力来应对教育中的每一个挑战是我们的义务。
【精解】①It is +n./adj.(for sb.)to do sth.意为“做某事(对某人来说)是....”，其中北是形式主语，真正的主语是后面的动词不定式。
【跟踪训练】
(6)学好英语对我们来说不容易。
It’s not easy for us ________ ________ ________ ________ my teachers.
【精解】②with the help of sb.意为“在某人的帮助下”，同义短语为with one’s help。
【跟踪训练】
(7)I passed the exam with my teachers’ help(同义句转换)
I passed the exam ________ ________ ________ ________ my teachers.
当堂检测
Ⅰ. 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词
1.U ________ you tell me the truth，I won’t believe you.
2.My students r ________ me as their best friend.
3.EducatiOn is an important part of our d ________ .
4.P1ease go home. Your mother is w ________ about you.
Ⅱ.用所给单词的适当形式填空
5 .The math problem isn't difficult. I can work it out ________ (easy).
6.Though Stephen Hawking has many physical problems, he becomes very famous and (success).
7.Our ________ (friend)has 1asted for years.
8.He has failed four times，but he wanted to have a ________ (hive)time.
Ⅲ.根据汉语提示完成句子
9.昨天我妈妈生我气了。
My mother ________ ________ ________ me yesterday
10.保护环境是我们的责任。
to protect the environment.
11.我们应当把这个难题当作一次新的挑战。
We should ________ the problem ________ a new challenge.
Unit 2
Section B(1a—2c)
学习目标
1.谈论自己过去喜欢的事情。
2.掌握下列知识点：
■重点词汇：hate，candy，chew，gum
■重点短语：①walk to school ②on the soccer team ③all the time
④worry about ⑤chew gum
■重点句型：
We have to take the bus to schoo1.
■语法：反意疑问句
预习导学
Ⅰ.英汉短语互译。
1.步行去上学
2.chew gum
3.一直;总是
4.nt he soccer team
Ⅱ.预习Section Bla,1b,写出你小时候喜欢的事情。
5.I used to like
6.I used to
7.I used
合作研讨
一、重点单词与短语
1.hateu.讨厌;恨;不喜欢
例如：I used to hate music class.我过去讨厌音乐课。
【拓展】hate后跟名词、代词、动名词或不定式作宾语,同义词为dislike，反义词like。
【跟踪训练】
(1)他不喜欢在晚上开车
He hates________________at night.
2.chew.嚼;咀嚼
【跟踪训练】
(2)吃饭要细嚼慢咽。
You must________________your food well before you swallow it.
3.worry about担心;焦虑
【拓展】与be worried about同义
【跟踪训练】
(3)不要担心她。
Don'ther.
二、重点句型与语法
■句型
We have to take the bus to schoo1.
我们不得不乘公共汽车去上学。
【精解】①have to意为“必须;不得不”，后跟动词原形。
【辨析】have to/must
have to具有客观性，不以人的主观意志为转移;而must强调主观性。have to可以用于各种时态，而must则不能。
【跟踪训练】
(4)他不得不早起赶早班车。
Heget up early to catch the early bus。
(5)我们必须学好英语。
We________________learn English________________.
【精解】②take the bus意为“乘公共汽车”,“take+the+交通工具”，相当于“by+交通工具”。
【跟踪训练】
(6) go to school by bus every day.(同义句转换)
I ________________to schoo1 every day.
■语法
反意疑问句
反意疑问句，表示说话人提出某种情况或建议，询问对方是否同意。
(1)反意疑问句的结构
反意疑问句是由“陈述句+反意疑问部分”构成，其反意疑问部分的结构是：be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语。否定形式要用缩略形式。
①主句为肯定陈述句，反意疑问部分为否定形式，即“前肯后否”式。
【跟踪训练】
(7)You are a student,
②主句为否定陈述句，反意疑问部分为肯定形式，即“前否后肯”式。
【跟踪训练】
(8)He hasn't finished his homework，
(2)反意疑问部分的主语和谓语的确定
①反意疑问部分的主语用代词而不用名词。
【跟踪训练】
(9)My brother likes playing basketball,
②陈述句中含有否定意义的词，如little，few, never ,hardly，nothing，nobody等，其反意疑问部分用肯定形式。
【跟踪训练】
(10)He knows little English，
③陈述句是“there be”结构时，其反意疑问部分用“be+there。
【跟踪训练】
(11)There is a post office near the school,
④以Let's开头的祈使句，反意疑问部分为shall we;以Let us开头的祈使句，反意疑问部分为will you;主句为祈使句，反意疑问部分为will you。
【跟踪训练】
(12)Let's go home，
(13)Don't be late again，
⑤陈述句中含有情态动词must时，若must表示“必须”时，反意疑问部分用needn't。若must表示推测“一定;想必”之意时，其反意疑问部分的动词应根据must后面的动词来确定。
【跟踪训练】
(14)We must work hard，
(15)She must have finished her homework,
⑥当陈述句为含有宾语从句的主从复合句时，反意疑问部分的动词和主语通常与主句的动词和主语保持一致。若主句的主语是第一人称I/we，其谓语动词又是think，sup-pose，believe，imagine等，则反意疑问部分的主语和动词应与从句的主语和动词保持一致。
【跟踪训练】
(16)Tom said that he would visit China next month，
(17)I think she can solve the problem，
(3)反意疑问句的答语
应根据具体的语言环境确定用肯定回答或否定回答，即根据事实回答。对“前否后肯”式的反意疑问句的回答要注意其回答形式要一致，即肯定用Yes，后面的部分用肯定形式，Yes译为“不”;否定用No，后面的部分用否定形式，No意为“是的”。
【跟踪训练】
(18)—Your father isn't a doctor, is he -(不,他是).
当党检测
Ⅰ.根据句意及首字母或汉语提示完成单词
1.I used to c________________gum a lot. What about you
2.一Do you like________________(糖果) 一No，I don't.
3.Some students usually go to school on(步行).
4.She used to________________(讨厌)gym class.
5.He is a basketball P________________.
Ⅱ.根据汉语提示完成句子
6.I don't (担心)tests.
7.Li Lei often (乘公共汽车)to school.
8.She (不得不)look after her little brother because her mother isn't at home.
九年级英语教案 篇4
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词：international,competitor, its, form, clay, balloon,scissors, lively,fairy, heat,polish,complete
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① They are made of bamboo and coveredwithpaper.
② According to Chinese history, skylanternswere first used by Zhuge Kongming.
③ They are seen as bright symbolsofhappiness and good wishes.
④ After drying, they are fired at averyhigh heat.
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解一些地方知名产品或传统艺术品的制作过程以及制作材料，培养学生的民族自豪感及爱国主义精神。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。
2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。
3)阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Step I. Revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. Review. 主动语态变被动语态的方法
Computers areusedto search information.
The story isoften repeated by the teacher.
The cats arecarefully looked after by Bill.
English isn’toften spoken by us at home.
StepII.Presentation
1. Present thenewwords on the big screen and learn the new words together.
clay n. 黏土;陶土 balloon n. 气球
scissors n. 剪刀fairytale 童话故事
paper cutting 剪纸 celebration n.庆典;庆祝活动
internationaladj. 国际的
e.g. The kilogramisthe international standard of weight.
公斤是国际通用的重量标准。
competitorn. 参赛者;竞争者
compete (动词)+ or → competitor (名词)
e.g. We cancompete with the best teams.
我们能与最好的队竞争。
Each competitorshould wear a number.
每个比赛者必须佩戴一个号码。
formn. 形式;类型
e.g. Jogging isahealthy form of exercise.
慢跑是一种健康的锻炼方式。
itsadj. 它的
e.g. My petdog likes catching biscuits inits mouth.
我的宠物狗喜欢用嘴接饼干。
livelyv. 生气勃勃的;鲜艳的
e.g. Mary isalovely young woman with imagination.
玛丽是一名富有想像力生气勃勃的年轻女人。
historicaladj. (有关)历史的
e.g. These arenotjust historical points.
这可不仅仅是历史的观点。
heat n.热;高温v. 加热;变热
e.g. Heat thewater,otherwise it will freeze. (动词)
把水加热，否则会结冰。
The heat fromthefire will soon dry your coat. (名词)
炉火的高温很快就会烘干你的上衣。
polish v. 磨光;修改;润色
e.g. Let’spolishthe silver before the guests arrive.
让我们在客人到达前将银器擦亮。
Would you polishupthe article a bit?
你把文章再润色一下好吗?
complete v. 完成
complete sth. 完成某事
completedoingsth. 完成做某事
e.g. They madeeveryeffort to complete the task.
他们尽最大努力完成任务。
They havejustcompleted building the bridge.
他们刚刚建成那座大桥。
2. Ss read andtryto remember the new words.
Step III. Lead-in
1. T: Play avideoof the Weifang Kite Festival
2. Asksomequestions about it.
e.g.
1. Do you knowwhatfestival is it?
It’sWei FangInternational Kite Festival.
2. Do youlikeflying kites?
What kind ofkitesdo you have?
Let some Sstalkabout it.
Step IV. Listing
Work on 1a
1. Do you knowhowto fly a kite? What are kites made of? Write down some materials used inmakingkites.
2. Let Ssdiscussabout it. Then write down their answers.
3. Check theanswerstogether.
bamboo,steel,paper, clothes, cord, knife, scissors and so on.
StepV.Listening
Work on 1b:
1. Tell Ss tolistento a conversation between Laura and Zheng Yun and circle the correctanswers.
2. Playtherecording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play therecordingagain and circle the correct answers.
3. Checktheanswers:
Work on 1c:
1. Let Ss readthesentences in 1c first. Tell Ss to listen again and write L for Laura or ZforZheng Yun.
2. Playtherecording again for the Ss to listen and write the words.
3. Ss listen totherecording carefully and try to write down their answers.
3. Check theanswerswith the class.
Work on 1d
Listen againandfill in the blanks with what you hear.
Ss listen and trytowrite down their answers:
Check theanswerswith the Ss.
StepVI.Role-play
1. Work inpairs.Role-play a conversation between Laura and Zheng Yun using theinformation in1b - 1d.
2. Let two Ss makeaconversation as a model:
A: Where did yougoon vacation?
B: I went toaninternational kite festival.
A: Thatsoundsinteresting. What did you see there?
B: I sawmanydifferent kinds of kites at the festival.
A: Were thekitesnice?
B: Yes, theywerebeautiful. They were made of different things like silk or paper. Somewerepainted with colorful drawings.
A: Sounds likeyoureally enjoyed it. I never thought that something as simple as kiteflyingcould be so exciting.
B: Yes, itwasreally fun to see which kite could fly the highest.
A: I think I wanttolearn to fly a kite, too.
3. See whichgroupsis the best.
Step VII. Talking
1. Show somepicturesof the paper cutting on the big screen. Tell Ss they are Chinese papercuttings.It’sone of the Chinese traditional arts.
T: Do you knowfolkor traditional arts? Now discuss with your partner.
2. Ask some Sssaywhat they know about the folk or traditional arts.
StepVIII.Reading
Tell Ssthefollowing is about three kinds of Chinese traditional arts.
Fast Reading:
1. Read thepassageand complete the chart below.
Traditionalart form Materials used
2. Checktheanswers.
Careful Reading
Work on 2c:
1. T: Now let’sreadthe passage again and answers the questions.
2. Let Ss readthequestions first and make sure they know the meaning of each question.
3. Ss readthepassage and answer their questions.
3. Check theanswerswith the class.
Work on 2d:
1. Let onestudentread the phrases in the box and translate them into Chinese.
2. Ss readthesentences and complete the sentences using the correct forms of the phrasesinthe box.
3. Check theanswerswith the Ss.
send out;rise into; turns, into; put on;such as; covered with
Step IX.Languagepoints
1. These usuallytryto show the things that are important in life, such as love, beauty andfamily.
such as和for example都有“例如”的意思，但是它们的用法有所不同。
九年级英语教案 篇5
一、重点短语
1. ……末尾 the end of 2. 去野餐 have a picnic3. 摆餐桌 lay the table4. 聚在一起 get together5. 倒数 count down6. 取决于 depend on7. 一……就…… as soon as8. 对……表示感谢 give thanks for...9. 大量 plenty of 10. ……的开始 the start of ... 11. 也 as well12. 度假 take a vacation
二、重点句型
1. It is a time for ...
是……的时候了。2. Is there anything special...?……有什么特别的事情吗?3. teach sb how to do...教某人怎样做……4. I hope that...我希望
三、重点语法
(一)不同身份1. 表示主从句的动作同时发生或几乎同时发生时，这类连词(组)有：when, while, as soon as。eg：When I felt hungry, my friend gave me a hamburger. While I was working, my mother called me. Xiaoming let me know as soon as he bought the tickets.
2. 表示主从句的动作先后发生时，这类连词有：before, after。eg：The thief had run away before the police arrived. After you finish the task, I will send you a present.
3. 表示主句动作为可持续性时，即主句谓语动词为持续性动词，这类连词有：until, since。eg：I watched TV until my father came back. She has saved money since she got the job.
(二)时态呼应在时间状语从句中，主句和从句之间的时态呼应问题一般分下列三种情况：1. 当从句表示“将来”的意义，用一般现在时，主句用一般将来时，即“主将从现”原则。eg：She’ll be angry when she sees the broken window.
2. 主句是祈使句，时间状语从句用一般现在时。eg：Turn off the tap when you brush your teeth.
3. 主句是一般过去时，时间状语从句也要用与过去相应的时态。eg：He was fond of drawing when he was a child.
九年级英语教案 篇6
一、重点短语
1. 叫醒 wake up
2. 关掉 turn off3. 担心 be worried about4. 出差 on business5. 整天 all day long 6. 依靠 depend on7. 厌烦 be bored with 8. 照顾 look after9. 许多 plenty of10. 两个 a couple of11. 注意 be careful with 12. 整理 tidy up13. 不善于 bad at14. 玩得开心 have fun15. 请求 ask...for...
二、重点句型
1. so...that... 如此……以至于……
2. be about to... 即将……3. I am sure that... 我确定……4. unable to do... 不能做
三、重点语法
so...that...意为“如此……以至于…… ”，so 后接形容词或副词的原级，表示程度，that 引导的是结果状语从句，例如：He has so many friends here that he doesn’t feel lonely at all. 在这儿他有很多朋友以至于他一点也不感到孤独。
although / though 作连词，意为“虽然;尽管;然而”，引导让步状语从句，例如：I exercised for half an hour though I was a little bit tired today. 尽管我今天有点累，我还是锻炼了半个小时。Although / though 引导让步状语从句时，不能与 but 同时使用，但可以与 yet, still 连用。
九年级英语教案 篇7
一、说教材
1、教材的地位和作用
在单元第10课是一篇题为" MAKF OUR WORLD MORE BEAUTIFUL "的阅读教材，通过对环境保护这一话题的叙述增强学生环境保护的意识，懂得如何在日常生活中保护环境，文中主要运用现在完成时态的句子，其中也穿插了一般现在时和过去时，学生在特定的语境中感觉和发现英语时态的变化，从而达到正确运用英语的时态能力。
2、教学目的
教学大纲指出要从英语的学科的特点出发，激发培养学生的兴趣，帮助学生树立学习英语的信心，克服学习中产生的畏惧心理和困难，建立语感，掌握语言基本知识和技能。
（1）知识目标
这一课的知识目标很明确，就是围绕"环境保护"这一话题，继续学习和巩固现在完成时态的用法，利用本课所学习的话题，把功能与语法教学紧密结合一起。
（2）能力目标
本课首先利用课前问题（pre-reading questions），启发学生利用已有的知识经验，对课文内容进行预测，就有关话题开展讨论，通过阅读验证自己的推测，吸取信息，掌握新的知识，丰富经验，从而达到独立阅读的能力。
3、教材的重点、难点、关键
（1）重点：本课重点
在其运用完成时态的句子谈论环保这一话题。
（2）难点：对课文内容及时态含义的理解。
（3）关键：在于是否能突破难关，达到正确运用完成时态表达句意、理解全文的目标。
4、对练习的处理
全文分为三部分，每一部分安排几个问题供学生回答，让学生边阅读边理解全文从而锻炼了学生听、说、读、写四方面结合的能力。
二、说教法
为落实大纲的要求，为满足学生个性化的要求，培养学生听、说、读、写各方面的能力，教师应从多层资助、多角度、多侧面进行，具体从教学方法和手段的多样性，本课教学应以以下方面进行。
1、阅读教学法
通过阅读课文，就有关问题开展讨论，吸取信息，掌握新的知识，丰富经验，通过一两个问题，让学生边读边寻找答案，要求 学生 在阅读时尽可能多地掌握课文内容，了解课文大意，让学生再细读课文，就课文口头提出问题，对未教过的生词和习惯用语有的直接加以解释，有的鼓励学生推测其意思，养成学生"用脑思考"的习惯，具有独立阅读的能力。
2、听、说、教方法
通过听录音，对课文内容有最初的了解，从而有能正确回答老师对课文，提出的'问题，讲解完后，还可通过录音，让学生的听力得到进一步的锻炼，还可让学生进行模仿练习，要语音和语调，老师进行朗读指导，并让学生复述课文，达到英语教学中说的目标。
3、辅助教学—电化教学化
制作一些生动图片，如扔拉圾的、吐痰、画画在公共场所、砍树等破坏环境的场景，对应的保护环境的图片，如拾垃圾到垃圾费纸筒、种花栽树等，通过这些直观图片让学生正确运用完成时态表达句意及环境保护意识有所提高。
4、对比教学
通过损害环境和改善环境两方面进行对比教学。
三、说学法
遵循"教为主导，学为主体，练为主线"的教育思想，但教师又要因人而导，对不同能力水平的学生给予不同的要求，从而达到英语学习的目标。
四、教学过程
Step1:组织教学 A duty report
Step2:以卡通图片的形式制作一个保护环境的公益广告课件，从而导入课题，起到一个热身的作用，调动学生的学习兴趣，树立学习英语的信心。
Step3 :教师介绍环保不仅仅是一个口号，一个话题，它更是一门系统的科学，更是一种意识，一种理念，一种生活方式，需要公众的广泛参与，空虚环节可以学生投入到环保学中来，置身于环保的实践学中，这对学习本课作好了铺垫。
Step4:介绍预读部分，让学生思考。
Step5:听录音，让学生理解全文大意，掌握新单词和一些重要词组，并回答老师提出的问题。
Step 6:通过制作的图片来呈现讲解全文，将全文分为三大部分，每一部分让学生用一句两句话来概括第一部分，通过课文中和图片，结合理解课文，判断句子的正误，了解全文大意，第二部分通过保护环境和损害环境进行对比，第三部分宣传保护环境的重要性，让每个公民为保护环境作贡献。
Step7:让学生复述课文，达到听、说、读、写四个方面的能力。
Step8:话题报告
根据话题内容进行口语训练，设计一个或几个小型的话题报告作业，如：How to Make Our School∕Neighbourhood/City（Town） More Beautiful 等，并将教学班分为四个组来进行操练 ,让每个人就自己选择的题目准备一篇80—100词的小型话题报告，鼓励各层次的学生参加这项活动，营造经松、活跃的气氛，这就是综合运用语言的一种有效方式，让学生在经松愉悦的情境下掌握使用语言的技巧和能力。
五、板书设计
Enviroment
Harm the envirornent
Protect the enviroment
throw litter onto the ground
pick up some rubbish and throw it intoa dustbindraw pictures on public wslls
collect waste paper and bottles for recylingspit in a public place
collect waste paper and bottles for recylingcut down trees
The world will become much more beautiful The world will become much dirtierWe must make a contribition to protecting the environment、
九年级英语教案 篇8
Teaching Important Points 【教学重点】
Key words & phrases：
expression，discover，secret，grammar，repeat，note，physics，chemistry;so…that/so that，because of，fall in love with，look up，take notes
Key sentences：
1.—How can I improve my pronunciation?
—One way is by listening to tapes.
2.—How can I read faster?
—You can read faster by reading word groups.
3.I usually practice my English by taking notes.
4.It's a piece of cake.
5.It serves you right.
Key structure：
verb+by doing
eg：Do you learn English by doing grammar exercises?
Teaching Difficult Points 【教学难点】
★Practice the structure “verb+by doing” in reading comprehension.
Teaching Aids 【教学工具】
A tape recorder，CAI or multimedia courseware.
Teaching Steps 【教学过程】
★Step 1Leading in 【新课导入】(Ⅰ)
1.Greeting
2.Brainstorming
Quickly ask questions about their English studying，using “by doing”.
3.Ask pairs of students to act out the conversation in 2d.
★Step 1Leading in 【新课导入】(Ⅱ)
1.Greeting
2.Revision
①Write the structure “by+doing” on the board and get the students to say some sentences about their English learning，using the structure.
②Role-play the conversation in 2d.
★Step 2Cooperative inquiry 【合作探究】
1.Finish the task in 3a
①Help the students to understand the demand in 3a and read the three questions.
②Quickly read the passage about Wei Fen and answer the three questions.
③Check and discuss the answers to the questions.
2.Finish the task in 3b
①Read the instructions.
②Read aloud the passage.
③Get the students to work by themselves and complete the sentences with what Wei Fen learn from watching TV.
④Check the answers with the whole class.
3.Finish Grammar Focus
①Read aloud the sentences in the grammar frame until fluently.
②Find out the preposition phrases “by…”.
③Remind that we use “by doing…” to talk about how we study or learn.Practice some sentences.
4.Finish the task in 4a
①Use PPT to show the six questions.
②Get the students to add more ways of learning English.
5.Finish the task in 4b
① Read the instructions and the sample sentence in 4b.Then ask a student to make a new sentence as an example.
②Students work in groups.
③Ask one student from each group to say out the sentences to the class.
6.Finish the task in 4c
①Check what the students do to learn English.
②Interview their partners.
③Write a report to tell what they do to learn English and report to the class.
★Step 3Homework
1.Interview more students about how they learn English after class.
2.Write a report about “Do we study English by doing the same thing?”
3.Translate the following sentences into English.
(1)我通过看英文电影来训练听力和口语。
________________________________________________________________________
(2)你通过阅读英文书报学习英文吗?是的。
________________________________________________________________________
(3)你多久写一篇英文日记?
________________________________________________________________________
Board Design板书设计
九年级英语教案 篇9
教学目标
1.学习现在完成时态的构成以及与现在的关系和对时间状语的要求，以及现在完成时 的陈述句形式和疑问句形式及其简略答语是本单元的教学重点。要求学生能初步运用现在完 成时态谈论一些过去发生的动作对现在造成的影响，掌握过去分词的构成。
2.能够熟练运用本单元有关“借物、寻物”的交际用语，正确运用Have you got…? 和Do you have…?及其简略答语。
3.掌握本单元的单词和短语，特别是used to，pay for，think of等用法。
4.利用阅读课文来培养学生的阅读理解能力和根据上下文判断生词词义的能力，并逐 步提高对学生阅读速度的要求。
5.要求学生能用自己组织的语言，对课文故事予以简述。
教学设计方案
一、教学内容
1.词汇(略)。
2.句型：1)Have you got…? 2) Have you found…yet? 3) I’m so glad.
3.语法：初步学习现在完成时态。
二、教具
录音机;一些学习、日常用具，如笔、字典、手表等。
三、课堂教学设计
1.复习 值日生报告。
2.教师可采用以下方法导出现在完成时态：
教师走到教室门前，做开门动作。边开门边问学生：
T：What am I doing?
Ss：You are opening the door.
打开门后，教师走回讲台，手指开着的门，反复说：
T：I have opened the door. Please look at the door. It is open now.
板书这个句子，用彩色粉笔写出助动词have和动词opened。
Teacher asks a students to clean the blackboard.
该同学在擦拭擦黑板时，教师向全班说：
She is cleaning the blackboard.
当该同学擦完黑板，走回座位，教师让全班看着擦干净的黑板，启发大家说出：
Ss：She has cleaned the blackboard.
3.板书刚才的主要句式。向学生介绍现在完成时态这个术语，要求学生观察其构成，扼要说明这个时态表示过去的行为对现在造成的影响和结果这一用法。
4.利用黑板上的句式，扼要介绍现在完成时态的构成和动词过去分词的构成方法。
5.打开书，学生阅读课文第 3部分，教师布置两个读前提问(Pre-reading questions)：
l)Where is the history book? 2)Where is the dictionary?
两分钟后，请学生回答。听录音，学生跟读两遍。
6.请一位同学到教室外站一会儿。让别的同学将他/她的英语书或尺子等物藏起来。请回这位同学。待他/她刚进教室，尚未走到座位之前时，教师提问：
T：Have you got an English book (or: a ruler)?
：Yes, I have.
T：Can I borrow it, please?
：Certainly.(走回自己座位，才发现东西不见了。教师要求该同学用刚刚学过的语言知识来表达)
Oh, I’ve lost my English book (Or; ruler).(问旁边的同学)Have you seen it anywhere? 如效果较好，可请几位同学反复表演。
7.指导学生做练习册习题。
8.布置作业
1)练习朗读本课对话，抄写生词;2)完成练习册习题。
四、难点讲解
Have you got a pencil? 你有铅笔吗?
在口语和非正式文体中，have got可以用来代替have。
在美国英语中，经常使用have或has;而在英国英语中则用have got或has got表示“有”。例如：
She has blue eyes.(美国英语;=She’s got blue eyes.)她长着蓝眼睛。
Do you have a brother?(美国英语;=Have you got a brother?)你有兄弟吗?
九年级英语教案 篇10
单元教材分析 单元学情分析
1.本单元主要是使学生学会用过去过去式态表达所做的事情，重点句型是：What did you do last weekend/yesterday? I played football. Did you read books? Yes, I did./No, I didn’t.由于涉及动词过去式的变化规则和读音规则，一般过去式有时学生的学习重难点之一。创设真实情境、组织有意义的任务或活动来展开一般过去式的教学，避免过分强调语法。本单元的内容安排体现了由浅入深、循序渐进的原则，A部分着重学习规则动词的过去式变化，而B部分的重点是不规则动词的过去式变化，如：go—went， read—read等。在教学中，要注意多创设情境，帮助学生内化，达到学以致用。
六年级学生性情稳静，理性,逻辑思维突起，有效地调动他们的学习积极性和自我表现意识是本课成功的关键。本课首先以学生的生活实际为出发点, 激发学生的好奇心，吸引他们的注意力;唤起学生的感知,调整学生投入到一种轻松,和协,快乐,高昂的学习状态。
单元教学目标：
1.能力目标
(1)能够对过去某人所做的事情进行问答，如:What did you do yesterday? I visited my grandparents.
(2)能够用一般过去式的一般疑问句形式询问别人过去某个时间所做的事情并作答。如：Did you go fishing last weekend? Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t.
(3)能够对某人过去某天所做的事情进行简单地叙述。
(4)能够唱歌曲At the Zoo
2.知识目标
(1)掌握A、B部分Let"s learn 、中的四会单词和句子,掌握一般动词过去式的变化规则，含规则变化和不规则变化。
(2)听说、认读A、B部分Let"s learn 、Let"s talk中的加粗句子。
(3)能够认读Pronunciation的音标及例词，完成单词音、形、意的连线活动。
(4)能够理解并会说唱Let"s chant。
(5)了解Story time 、Good to know、Task time等内容并尝试借助提示表演故事中的部分内容。
3.情感、策略、文化等有关目标
(1)情感态度：热爱生活，关心他人，培养学生合理安排生活的能力。
(2)学习策略：积极运用所学语言进行交流，通过完成不同形式的记忆游戏发展学生的记忆能力。
(3)文化目标：了解一些西方国家图标的意思，培养学生的环保意识。
课时教学设计
课题：Unit3 A Let’s try Let’s talk 备课人： 上课人：
教学目标：
掌握四会句型Where did you go over your holiday? I went to Mt. Tianshan, Xinjiang. 并在实际情境中灵活运用。
教学重点：
掌握四会句型Where did you go over your holiday? I went to Mt. Tianshan, Xinjiang. 并在实际情境中灵活运用。 教学难点：
1.能够听、说、读、写Where did you go over your holiday? I went to…等句型。
2. 如何在现实生活中运用所学单词、词组和句型。
教具学具课件准备：
录音机，磁带，单词卡，挂图。 第几课时：1
探索流程 个性添加(教学反思)
Step 1. Warm- up and revision
1、Enjoy the song: At the zoo
2、Daily oral practice
Good morning. Glad to meet you. How are you? What day is today? What’s the weather like today?
Step 2. Presentation
Let’s talk
设计主情景“我是小小侦探”
1、“谁打扫了教室”
教师用课件动画形式出现一个明亮干净的教室。
出现一个老师和一个学生John。
Look, our classroom. It’s very clean and tidy. But who cleaned it. I don’t know. I want to thank him. Can you help me to find him?
J: I can help you to find him.
John跑了出去，碰到了Sarah，John就问Sarah. J: What did you do last weekend?
Sarah: Hmm! I watched TV.
John跑去问了Wu Yifan.
J: What did you do last weekend?
W：Hmm! I played football.
板书句型：What did you do last weekend? I played football. 学生朗读。
教师头带John的头饰T: Look, John come to our class. He wants to find who cleaned the classroom last weekend.
T: What did you do last weekend?
S1: I …
T: What did you do last weekend?
S2: I …
T: Did you help the teacher clean the classroom?
引导学生回答。
板书help，并朗读。
Step 3. Consolidation
2、Activity 2
3、Activity 3 Make the chant.
4、“找到了”
通过课件展示John和Zoom的对话。
J: What did you do last weekend?
Z: I played football at school.
J: Did you help the teacher clean the classroom?
Z: Yes, I did.
J: Oh, Zoom. You are great!
5、听录音，跟读书本对话。
6、学生一起朗读对话。
板书设计 作业布置
Unit3 Last weekend
What did you do last weekend?
Where did you go over your holiday?
What did you do?
九年级英语教案 篇11
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1)掌握本单元基础知识，掌握过去完成时的结构和用法。
2)能够根据所学知识进行写作，提高学生的写作能力。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
二、教学重难点
过去完成时的用法
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming up and revision
1. Have adictationof the new words and expressions this unit.
2. Retellthestories of April Fool’s Day .
根据句意，用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。
1) By the endoflast year, I ___________ (be) to the West Hill Farm three times.
2) By the time Igotup, Mom _________ (go) out for some exercise.
3)I______________(learn) 1,000 English words by last term.
4) By 9 o’clocklastnight, we __________ (get) 200 pictures from the spaceship.
5) When I wentintothe classroom, the final bell ___________ (ring). I was happy that Iwasn’tlate.
Keys: hadbeenhadgonehad learnedhad gottenhad rung
根据句意和汉语提示，填写恰当的短语完成下列句子。
1) He ___________(醒来) very early and went out for a walk inthepark.
2) I______________(让她搭便车), so she invitedme to have dinner.
3) I hope thatallof you will come to the meeting ____________ (准时).
4) Hiscar___________ (出故障), so he had to getit repaired.
5) This Mondaymyalarm clock didn’t __________ (发出响声) and I got uplate.
Keys: woke up gave her a lifton timebroke downgo off
Ⅱ. Lead-in
Do you haveanyexperience on April Fool’s day? Now can youremember a lucky or an unlucky day?What happened? Make some notes about whatyou remember.
III. Practice.
1. Work on 3a.Makenotes.
Can you rememberalucky or an unlucky day? What happened? Make some notes about whatyouremember.
What was thedate?
What happenedfirst?
Was this luckyorunlucky? Why?
Whathappenednext?
How did thedayend?
How did youfeelabout this day?
2. Share yourideaswith others in class.
IV. Writing
1. Write astoryabout your lucky or unlucky day and tell your story to a partner or theclass.Use your notes to write a story about your lucky or unlucky day.
写作指导：常见的表达句型：
My lucky/unlucky day
I willalwaysremember the date…
This wastheluckiest /unluckiest day of my life…
When I woke upthatmorning…
Later that day…
I couldn’tbelieve…
Then/After that…
Finally…
I think….
What alucky/anunlucky day!
2. Ask Ss to writeapassage in class.
3. Tell yourstoryto your partner or the class.
Example:
My lucky day
I willalwaysremember the date –April Fool’s Day last year.
This wastheluckiest day of my life.
When I woke upthatmorning, I brushed my teeth, washed my face, then I read English for halfanhour. It was time to eat my breakfast. My little brother gave me a pieceofOreo. I was very glad to eat it first. Then I felt strange. It tastedspecial.What was it? I looked at my little brother. He laughed loudly and saidnothing.
Later that day,Iknew he put toothpaste (牙膏) into the Oreo. Icouldn’t believe I wasfooled by him. I brushed my teethagain. After that, my brother gave me a box ofOreo, and said “Happy April Fool’s Day.”
Finally I washappyto get these delicious biscuits.
I think I hadahappy and lucky day.
What a lucky day!
V. Self-check.
Work on SelfCheck1:
1. Let some Ssreadthe words in the box. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words.
2. Let Ss readthesentences in Self check 1. Then Ss try to fill in the blanks with thecorrectforms of the words in the box.
cancelmiss west accident
ladyofficermarketunexpected
Last Saturdayaftermy French course, I decided to drive to the ________ to buy a meat piefordinner. As I was heading ________, I saw a huge truck in the middle of theroad.
There had beena(n)_________ and there were many police _______ around. I turned around anddecidedto go to a nearby mall.
However, I________the road that led to the mall. Then I saw a restaurant that soldchickennoodles. I went inside and the _____, who was the owner, served me themostdelicious bowl of chicken noodles ever. I had made a(n) ____________discovery!I’mso glad that I _________ my plan to go to the market.
1. Letsome Ss read their answers. Check theanswers with the Ss.
Keys: market west accident officersmissedlady unexpected canceled
Work on Self check2
1. Tell Ss thattheyhave to fill in the blanks with Past Perfect Tense. More than one answersmay bepossible.
2. Ss think andtryto complete the sentences by themselves.
3. Let some Ssreadtheir answers to the class.
4. Sharetheiranswers together.
e.g.
1) A: Why didn’tyouhand in your science homework?
B: Before Icould start working on it, mybaby brother started crying and I had to lookafter him as my mother was sick.
2) A: Why didn’tyoutake a shower this morning?
B: By the time Igotup, my sister had already gone into the bathroom and the bus was honkingfor meto hurry up.
3) A: Why didyou have to walk home from school?
B: By the timeIleft my school, the school bus had already left.
VI. Exercise
1. We ______fourthousand new words by the end of last year.
A. learned B.had learned
C. have learnedD.willlearn
2. He told usthathe ______ the letters in the morning.
A. willpost B.haveposted
C. wasposting D. had posted
3. —Did you seeMr Smith when you were in France?
—No. When I_______ France, he _______ to China.
A. had arrivedin;had gone
B. arrived in;hasbeen
C. got to;hadgone
D. had got to;hadbeen
VII. Homework
1. 复习本单元内容。
2. 对家人进行调查，看他们在生活或工作中有没有被人愚弄或是否愚弄过别人，写篇短文，和大家分享。
九年级英语教案 篇12
外研版九年级上册英语教案
外研版九年级英语上册 Module 10 Unit 1教案
设计的基本理念：依托外研版九年级新教材第十模块，根据新课标的崭新理念，以培养学生自主、合作、探究精神，突出培养学生的综合英语语言运用能力为指导思想而设计。
课 型：Listening and speaking
教学内容分析：
1．单元教材内容贴近学生生活，主要涉及运动训练、健康饮食以及身体健康等，易于学生接受。同时，前面几个模块已对定语从句进行了学习，已有一定基础，对培养学生发散思维和锻炼口语有着积极的作用。
2．教材内容的前几个模块一直都在学习定语从句which ,that, who的用法，经过前几个单元的铺垫，本单元whose引导的定语从句教学就不是难点。
学生分析：
1．已处于九年级上学期，经过初中阶段两年多的系统学习，已具有一定的认知水平和对英语语言的运用水平。
2．学生的主动思考与口语水平不高。所以在这一单元的`学习中，可能很多学生的参与性较差，所以应该采取有效的措施，提高学生开口的安全感，引导学生积极参与学习过程，实实在在地提高教学的实效性。
教学目标：
1． 正确使用下列单词和词组：ache ，exercise ,weight, give up ,interest.
Behave, persuade ，ban, educate等。
2．掌握并运用下列词组： give up, need to do,bump into等。
3．掌握whose 引导的定语从句并灵活运用。
教学策略：
1. 开放式教学策略。以有限的课堂为载体，带学生进入广阔的知识天地。
2. 兴趣激发策略。有了兴趣，学生才会有了参与的欲望，才能点燃他们的思维火花。
3. 任务型活动策略。在做中学，在做中练，在做中巩固往往有良好的效果。
学习策略：
1. 课前预习，找出文章重难点与重点的短语语句。
2. 合作学习。学会倾听、学会表达、学会讨论，学会合作学习。注意学习方法，在小组合作中、在班级合作中，学习他人长处，学习沟通技巧，最终在学习中不断成长。
教学手段：
本课采用任务型教学法，用多媒体、录音机等辅助教学手段进行，为学生运用英语进行交际创设情景，实现师生互动，生生互动。
教学重点：
1.重点词汇：ache，exercise, weight, give up, interest. behave, persuade ，ban, educate等
2.重点句型： whose 引导的定语从句
教学难点：定语从句的理解和运用
教学过程
一、
1）The teacher asks：
How are you?
Do you often do sports?
What’s your favourite sports?
Answer the questions. (展开竞赛，学生抢答，激发学生参与课堂的积极性)
2）Lead the students’ attention to the pictures and the new words on the book.
Say something about the pictures. Read the words on the book.
利用图片与文字的联系，建立概念与所指之间的直接关联，减少母语的干扰。同时，锻炼了学生们听、说的能力，动静结合，使学生们在适当的情境中，快乐的学习本单元所学词汇和短语。为接下的听说做好铺垫。
3) 听力训练
Do Activity 2.
依据目标：采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，掌握运用语言的能力。
Play the tape and ask： What does Tony do to keep fit? What do his classmates think of it?Listen to the tape and answer the questions.
简单易答的问题入手，使学生敢于发言.
Ask them match the words in Activity 5.
SS do these parts according to the aims.
充分调动各类学生积极参与英语课堂和自主学习英语的能力。使学生通过亲身体验，合作式的完成任务，通过交流、最终培养了学生良好的综合语言运用的能力。
二、合作探究
1）Read the dialogue by themselves ,then act it in groups to grasp it 。
2）at the same time ,find “whose “modle” ，and write them down.
3) groups show the dialogue in class.
4)Solve the problems in the dialogue, find out the difficults and important points.
三、知识点精析
1）a bit 意为“有点儿”，可修饰形容词及其比较级。
He is a bit tired..
知识拓展：a bit 与a little
(1) 当肯定句中修饰形容词或副词是，可互换。
(2) 修饰不可数名词时，a little= a bit of.
(3) 与not 连用时，not a bit表示“一点也不” not a little“非常”，相当于very.
He’s not a bit tired. 他一点也不累。 He’s not a little tired. 他非常累。
2）give up 意为“放弃”，其后常接名词、代词或动名词，若是人称代词，只放中间。 Though English is hard to learn, you shouldn’t give it up.
3)He doesn’t look like someone whose fitness and health interest him very much.
“interest”作动词，意为“使。。。。。感兴趣”。也可用作名词，意为“兴趣，爱好”常用于词组“feel/have/show/take/an interest in sb./sth.
四．巩固提升。
合并复合句
1. There is a girl. Her glasses are red.
______________________________________.
2. We went back to help the girl. The girl’s bike is broken.
_______________________________________________.
3. This is a book.I’m looking for the book.
____________________________________________.
五．达标测试。
根据汉语意思完成句子。
1. 如果你想保持身体健康的话就不要放弃。
Don’t ______ ______ if you want to _____ ________.
2. 汤姆对这部有趣的电影很兴趣。
Tom _____ _____ ＿＿the ______film.
3. 厨房里还有点面包。
There is ____ ____ ____ bread in the chicken.
六．课后提升。
What’s the best way to stay fit and healthy? Why? 结合所学内容以及自己的感悟写一篇60词左右的小文章。
课后反思：
本节课健康训练与保持为话题展开教学，进行多层次的听力训练，由浅入深，由易到难不同学生都能学有所获，之后进行学生自己以及小组的对话练习与展示，使学生进一步加强对素材的熟悉，然后进行小组合作探究处理教材重难点，在设置写的训练，效果较好，但小组的评价时机要进一步做好处理。
小学英语教案五篇
我们已经为您准备了多篇涉及“小学英语教案”的内容，相信这些文章会在某个领域上让您有所进步。教案课件是老师工作中不可或缺的一部分，如果老师还没有写的话，现在也来得及。教案的科学化管理和规范化教学是非常重要的，它能够帮助教师更好地进行教学工作。
小学英语教案(篇1)
知识与能力目标：
1.本课学习巩固功能句型What are you interested in? 及回答I’m interested in…. I enjoy….表达自己的兴趣爱好。学习如何在真实的情景中谈论兴趣爱好，进行真实日常交流。并学习单词reading , dancing , jogging , exercising.
2.通过创设真实生动的情景，学生能够运用句型What are you interested in? 及回答I’m interested in….I enjoy….表达自己的兴趣爱好。
3.培养和提高学生在真实情景中运用语言的能力。
过程与方法目标：
1.通过演唱活泼的歌曲和chant，调动学生积极性。
2.通过看视频来创设语言环境，激发学生求知欲，给学生进行大量的语言输入。
3.通过小组的操练活动让学生在交流体验中接受新知识。通过认读和表演增强对课文的掌握和运用。
4.通过小组合作共同完成sing, draw , chant ,dialogue, game 等不同形式的活动任务，鼓励学生充分感知、理解和运用所学句型What are you interested in? 及回答I’m interested in….I enjoy….表达自己的兴趣爱好。培养和提高学生在真实情景中运用语言的能力。
5.通过教师不同层次的语言评价，小组竞赛以及奖励小组卡通标志的图片等评价形式，激励学生的学习兴趣和积极性。使学生在英语课程的学习过程中不断体验进步与成功。
情感与态度目标：
1.通过丰富有趣的活动，让学生体会到学习英语的乐趣，并感受在日常生活中如何运用英语，如何用英语表达自己正确的意思。
2.对学生进行养成健康广泛的兴趣爱好的德育教育，同时培养文明礼貌的好品质。
小学英语教案(篇2)
一、说教材
本节课所选的教学内容是PEP小学英语四年级Unit6《Meet My Family》PartA，围绕meet my family展开话题。本课时要求学生能听说认读四会单词family，parents，aunt，uncle，babybrother及句型how many… .能自由交流各自家庭情况，使学生能用英语简单介绍自己的家庭及成员。我借助”任务型“教学采用多样化的教学手段将听、说、玩、演、唱溶于一体，激发学生学习英语的兴趣和愿望，使学生通过合作学习体验荣誉感和成就感从而树立自信心，发展自主学习的能力，形成初步用英语进行简单日常交际的能力。
1、说教学目标
新课程强调知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度与价值观三个角度的有机结合，本着这样的认知，我制定如下教学目标。
[认知目标]学生能听、说、读短语及单词：family，parents，aunt，uncle，babybrother能运用how many......进行口语交际。
[能力目标]能用简单的英语介绍自己的家庭成员以及各自的基本特点。
[情感目标]1)通过活动、游戏使学生产生学习英语的兴趣;让学生敢于、乐于开口，积极参与交流。并让学生在学习的过程中，培养他们的合作意识和竞争意识。2)通过本课的教学，教育学生热爱自己的家人。同时升华到爱校，爱国，爱地球，将对小家的爱提升到爱大家的层次，教育学生热爱自然，保护环境。
2.教学重难点
根据以上对教学内容和教学目标的分析以及小学生的认识规律和英汉语言差异，我认为对五个单词及交际性语言的学习是本课的重点。本课的难点是句型“How many people are there in your family?”句型的理解及运用。
二、说学情
英语有一句谚语："Education must be fun ."(教育必须是有趣的)。同时，学生是学习的生体，在教学中，教师要善于做一个引导者，为学生创设生动、活泼、和谐的英语学习氛围，让学生积极主动参与学习，成为学习的主人。
本课的教学对象是学过一年英语的四年级学生，此段学生天真活泼，好奇心强，有较强的模仿能力和求知欲望，而且富有一定的逻辑思维能力。在教学方法的总体构思上，注重学生听、说、唱、玩几方面能力的综合训练，采用任务型教学、情境教学法、全身心反应法、多元评价法等教学方法，激发学生学习英语的兴趣，训练学生的英语能力，培养学生用英语说话做事的能力。在调动学生积极性和主动性方面，我创设情境，利用游戏、魔术、小组合作、多种练习和评价手段，让学生自己动手动脑，参与教学活动全过程，形成课堂教学师生互动，提高课堂教学质量。
三、说教法和学法
1、教法设计
为使学生在“玩演视听”的过程中积极地参与到教学活动中，培养他们的口语能力，交际能力和创新意识，结合本课实际，我采用以下教法：
1)以旧引新、激发学习兴趣
课程伊始，通过引导学生观察教室里陈设物品的数量，引出“How many...?”的句型，为后面学习“How many people are there in your family?”作好铺垫。观察手指，引出歌曲“finger family”，富有童趣的动画及歌词，大大调动了学生的学习兴趣。
2)以任务组织教学，学生参与体验
以family为主题，由学生所熟知的“幸运52”揭示本课时的三个任务，遵循由浅渐深、循序渐进的认知规律，科学地安排教学内容，合理设计教学任务，并开展形式多样的教学活动。从激发学生的学习兴趣入手，通过“任务型”的教学途径来进行教学。学生在履行任务的过程中，以参与、体验、互动、交流、合作的学习方式，充分发挥自身的认知能力，调动他们已有的目的语资源，在实践中感知、认识、应用目的语，在“干”中学，“用”中学，从而实现课堂高效。
3)创设真实情境，开展活动教学。
小学生好奇心，求知欲强，善于模仿，喜欢活动。针对这些心理特征，结合即将到来的圣诞节，我创设了一个圣诞节聚会的情境，并在整个教学过程中贯穿始终，自然的引入了“baby brother”等新单词的学习。猜一猜、火眼金睛等游戏让学生兴趣高涨，在“family”教学中的magic show恰到好处的进行了德育渗透。
2、学法指导
教师的教归根结底是为了学生的学，而教学效果的优劣很大程度上取决于学生学习方法的科学与否。因此，我对学法指导这一部分作了精心的设计，在学法指导上，重视多元智能教学理论、合作学习法和任务型语言学习法等应用。这些方法的运用，能充分调动学生的各种感觉器官，激发学生积极参与课堂游戏活动。通过这些活动不仅能培养学生大胆表达的良好学习习惯，而且还为学生提供充分的语言实践机会。如本节课中的调查活动及对How many句型的拓展运用，学习的空间更加开放，能激发学生创造性地使用所学的语言，从而使学生的思维得以激活，学生自主学习的能力得以发展。
四、说教学过程
1、Warm-up
师生互相问好，拉进彼此距离，引导学生观察教室的陈设，复习“How many”句型，接着由“How many figers can you see”?引出“finger family”的歌曲，学生欣赏歌曲。
[设计意图：教师手指上可爱的头像，生动有趣的歌曲加上轻松的greeting能够拉进师生间的距离，既缓减学生的紧张，又渲染英语学习气氛，使学生的注意力马上集中到课堂上来，并为后面新授内容做了铺垫。在我的finger family亮相的时候，我听到了学生的感叹声，所以这一环节的设置还是成功的。]
2、Presentation
Step1：由学生熟知且喜爱的“幸运52”砸金蛋游戏引出本节课的学习任务。
[设计意图：由游戏引出本课的学习任务，学生乐于接受，保持了学生的学习热情。同时，有利于学生带着目标有的放矢地去学习新知。因为学生比较熟悉幸运52，PPT上的金蛋也比较诱人，所以提出砸金蛋看任务的时候，学生的兴趣还是比较浓厚的。]
Step2:从圣诞节回家聚会引入，学习新词baby brother，在学习的过程中让学生注意观察baby brother的情绪，引出问题Who does he want?学生给出不同的答案，PPT显示一家人在一起的照片，He wants his father and mother. He wants his parents.学习新词parents.
[设计意图：圣诞节马上要到了，学生也非常熟悉这个节日，因此我创设了一个圣诞节回家聚会的情境，伴随《Merry Christmas》的音乐，让学生在轻快的音乐伴奏中开始新知。但是由于硬件的问题，音乐没有播放出来，所以气氛没有渲染出来。由这一情境，引出baby brother/parents的学习。Baby的情绪本来在课件中都有体现，有哭，有笑，但是也没有播放出来，这个情境本来是起一个调节情绪的作用，效果没有达到。在学习parents的时候，PPT显示fathert和mother是用红色爱心圈出来，飘起来后合在一起，再呈现单词parents，学生一看便知道这个词的意思，一目了然，同时也是一个很好的情感教育。]
Step3:学习新词：uncle/aunt.通过猜一猜的游戏引出单词uncle/aunt的学习。用Who’s your father’s brother?学习单词uncle.用Who’s your mother’s sister?学习单词aunt.
[设计意图：让学生在学习单词的同时，了解各个家庭成员间的联系，游戏的方式令学习更为生动有趣。]
Step4:滚动操练，学习新词family.首先用粉笔将黑板上的单词卡片圈成一棵树，让学生明了family tree这一概念，学习新词family，然后让学生读一读PPT上的句子，Father and mother I love you.再让学生读一读红色的字母，学生发现f-a-m-i-l-y这几个字母组成了单词family。然后让学生闭眼睛，读三遍“I love my family”，老师在此时把Family tree变成一个大爱心，借机对学生进行情感教育:We should love our father and mother, love our family.火眼金睛的游戏，让学生快速认读单词，达到巩固本课新词的目的。而后的Let’s chant让学生在有节奏的韵律中再次巩固单词和句子。
[设计意图：通过反复的语言输入与输出，加深学生对单词的认知。考察孩子们对单词的掌握情况，同时训练他们的观察能力和想象能力。传授family的同时玩了一个小小的戏法，既活跃了课堂气氛，又是情感教育的再一次升华。但是不知道是不是我的气氛渲染的不够，还是戏法不太精彩，学生的赞叹声不是很多。另外速读单词的游戏，既增添课堂气氛又争取让我的学生限度的当堂掌握新学的单词。这里的练习效果比较好，学生非常活跃。Chant则避免了枯燥的记单词，说句子，让学生在有节奏的韵律中动起来，完成第一个学习新单词的任务。]
Step5:学习如何介绍家人，获取super family的光荣称号。承接Christmas Day的主线，邀请学生一起认识自己的家人，给学生一个model，接着让学生用简单的英语介绍自己的家庭，优秀的可以得到super family的光荣称号，并在小组内交流。
[设计意图：承接Christmas的主线，自然引出自己的家庭情况，起到了为学生示范的作用。“super family”的设置能增强学生的竞争意识，并添加操练的趣味性，小组交流让每位学生都有了使用所学语言的机会，完成用英语介绍家庭成员的任务。这里由于时间仓促，考虑不是很周全，所以敢上台来说的同学不多，如果在表演之前先让学生在小组内操练，效果应该会更好一些。]
Step6:句型学习、操练。教师再创设一个情境，It’s lunch time. I’m hungry. Let’s have a family lunch!让学生数一数，并回答How many people are there in my family? Who are they?然后学习句型：How many people are there in my family?
[设计意图：创设情境，学习本课难点：How many people are there in my family?完成任务三。]
3. Practice
1)Make a survey.给学生一个Model,让学生明确认所要完成的任务，然后分小组开展调查，What’s your name?How many people are there in my family?Who are they?并完成调查表。
2)拓展练习。PPT显示一幅图，图上有许多种动物，先让学生认一认，然后引导学生用How many are there in the picture?提问，并自由选择学生回答。
3)让学生在小组内互相问一问：How many books/pens/pencils... are there inyour bag/pencil-case...?
[设计意图：教师教学的重要任务是让学生学会学习(Learn how to learn.)。力求用简单生动、通俗易懂的方式渗透学习策略，发掘他们积极求知、努力进取的潜力。因此我在检测学生掌握新句型时，设计一个小型的任务型活动，让学生利用语言“What’s your name? How many people are there in your family? Who are they?”调查一下自己朋友家庭的情况，加强学生之间彼此的交流。接着对所学知识进行一个拓展，由图中有些什么，有多少?到你的书包、文具盒等都有多少文具、书本等。通过练习，鼓励学生主动思考，主动做事，并将所学知识学以致用。由于内容较多，加上时间把握的问题，所以拓展没有达到预想的效果。]
4.Summary
回顾本课所完成的任务，将热爱小家的感情进行升华。首先显示江汉路小学的照片，引出School is our family. We love our school. (依次出示中国地图，地球照片) China is our family. We love China. The earth is our family.引出更深一层次的情感教育，我们只有一个地球，请热爱自然，保护环境。
[设计意图：回顾所完成的任务，进一步巩固新知识，教育学生热爱自己的家人。同时升华到爱校，爱国，爱地球，将对小家的爱提升到爱大家的层次，教育学生热爱自然，保护环境。这里如果时间充裕，让学生说一说效果会更好。]
五、说预期达成效果
期望学生在自主、和谐、轻松的自然学习氛围中学会本课时的五个单词“family, parents, uncle, aunt, baby brother”和一个句型“How many people are there in my family?”通过每一个教学游戏活动，使学生在不断地习得和使用语言中将语言知识内化，发挥学生思维的活跃和才能。同时让学生在完成各项任务中体会到英语学习的乐趣，感受自如使用英语的成就感。通过小组合作，锻炼学生的合作能力，融洽学生间的关系。最终达到学习语言，使用语言的教学目的。
因为是借用别的学生，对学生的学习习惯，知识水平认识浅显，课堂中对学生习惯的调控还是未知，通过教学，预期全班95%学生能达到学习目标。较好的使用语言与同伴和教师交流90%的学生能够达到。在教学中师生之间的交流应该是和协的，学习氛围是浓厚的，学习过程是快乐的。
小学英语教案(篇3)
新版人教版一年级上册语文教案梳理为范文网的会员投稿推荐，但愿对你的学习工作带来帮助。
教案中对每个课题或每个课时的教学内容，教学步骤的安排，教学方法的选择，板书设计，教具或现代化教学手段的应用，各个教学步骤教学环节的时间分配等等，都要经过周密考虑，下面给大家分享一些关于最新人教版一年级上册语文教案梳理，希望对大家有所帮助。
最新人教版一年级上册语文教案1《语文园地五(第一课时)》语文教案
教学目标
1.积累12个表示时间的词语，并认识相关的5个生字。
2.能按结构归类，通过归类巩固认字;
能发现每组字的偏旁，并尝试写出几组这样的字，拓展识字。(重点)3.复习汉语拼音，区分平舌音、翘舌音、鼻音和边音，前鼻韵母和后鼻韵母，读准字音。
(重、难点)4.了解笔顺规则，正确书写汉字。
5.能正确朗读并背诵古诗《悯农(其二)》，激发学生阅读积累古诗的兴趣。
(难点)6.在师生共读故事《拔萝卜》中，丰富语言，激发学生阅读的兴趣。
课前准备
1.课件、字母和相关的生字卡片，小羊、青草、老爷爷和老婆婆头饰等。
(教师)2.生字卡片。
(学生)课时安排
2课时。
教学过程
第一课时
一、创设情境，激趣导入
1.导入：孩子们，在《喜羊羊与灰太狼》这部动画片中，你最喜欢哪只羊呢?(随着学生发言相机板书羊的名字)我们今天就分成懒羊羊、美羊羊、沸羊羊和喜羊羊四个小队进行“羊羊小队PK赛”。
大家有信心取胜吗?(有)那我们就出发吧。2.课件出示闯关图。
设计意图：利用学生喜欢的动画片中的人物形象，分成小队带领学生去“闯关”，引起学生的好奇心和求知欲，从而使学生迅速进入学习的最佳状态。
二、分层闯关，巧学夯知
1.趣味识字。
(1)过渡：“羊羊小队PK赛”现在开始!让我们一起来到第一关。
(2)屏幕出现打乱顺序的表示时间的词语，(上午、下午、晚上)请同学们按照时间的先后顺序排列。相机学习“午”“晚”。
(3)导学：同学们，你们真聪明，能按照顺序排列时间。如果老师再给你几个表示长时间的词语，你能排列吗?(打乱顺序出示“天”“月”“年”三个字。)相机学习“年”“昨”“今”。
(4)第二关：打乱顺序出示表示时间的词语，请同学们一一排列出来。
(5)通过刚才的比赛，同学们齐心协力地帮时间宝宝回到了自己的位置。下面，我们再复习一下它们的名字。(出示带生字的词语，生字变色放大)说说你是怎样记住它们的。
2.我的发现。
(1)(显示第一关)过渡：小朋友们真了不起，顺利闯过第一关。让我们一起挑战第二关。
(2)(显示第二关)出示木牌，上面写着：采摘苹果我最行。
播放课件：将书上的字制成苹果树。秋天到了，美丽的苹果园丰收了，瞧!满树的红苹果多可爱呀!仔细看看，你还发现了什么?对，淘气的字宝宝跑到苹果上了，你认识这些字吗?
(3)自己练读，如果有不认识的字可以请教其他同学。
(4)教师出示课件：两个小朋友走进画面，挎着的小筐上面分别写着“草字头”和“木字旁”。看，他们来摘苹果了。请把属于他们的苹果放到正确的篮筐里。
(5)课件显示：“草字头”的字放进第一个篮子里。“木字旁”的字放进第二个篮子里。咦?聪明的小朋友，你能猜到他们是根据什么采摘苹果的吗?
(6)小组讨论：按照偏旁部首来摘苹果的。
(7)你还知道其他“草字头”和“木字旁”的字吗?
(8)拓展：让学生再说几个跟树木有关的字。
(9)小结：小朋友们，你们认识的字真多。瞧!我们的汉字多有意思。一个偏旁，就有那么多好朋友。在我们今后的生活中，也要多留心这样有相同偏旁的字，这样才能打开汉字的大门，成为识字小达人!
3.字词句运用。
(1)导学：请学生读要求。
(2)师：(出示拼音卡片：z、zh、s、sh、n、l)这些拼音娃娃都是我们的朋友，你还认识它们吗?(各小队开火车认读。教师相机指导区别平舌音和翘舌音、鼻音。)它们每个都带上今天的好朋友，你还认识它们吗?(出示书上的音节)指生读。
(3)出示生字卡片，两组词同时出现，分小队认读。小队长组织，每人同时读一组。(如：你们、家里)
(4)打开书，同桌比读。
(5)游戏：小羊吃青草。两个小队一组。(根据学生实际进行几轮游戏)分别选出六名学生扮演羊，头饰上写着词，另一队扮演青草，头饰上写着音节。让“羊”去“吃草”。其他同学和老师当评委，看看哪只“羊”“吃草”动作最快，评出“最佳小队”。
4.书写提示。
(1)过渡：小朋友们，你们这么聪明可爱，喜羊羊他们可高兴啦!他们想邀请你们去他们家做客，你们高兴吗?可是你们看，他们每个人的羊屋都有一把奇怪的钥匙。(课件出示：四间羊屋，每个字在羊屋上闪出，只有认真观察的孩子才能想出打开门的方法)
(显示第三关，出示木牌，上面写：火眼金睛我最行)
(2)小组讨论：仔细观察前两间羊屋，动脑想一想：他们是按照什么顺序写的呢?(从左往右)对啦，开门的顺序就是从左往右。
(3)学生汇报，师板书。
(4)再看看后两间羊屋，上面的字有什么相同的地方?(先撇后捺)
(5)拓展练习：你们可真聪明，这么快就找到了开启每间羊屋的金钥匙。你们能根据羊屋钥匙的特点，再写一些这样的字吗?和队员一起写，比一比哪个小队写得最多。
5.日积月累。
(1)过渡：小朋友们你们真棒!一气呵成，连闯三关。下面让我们一起走进“日积月累”，到古诗的浩瀚大海中捧一朵美丽的浪花吧!(显示第四关，出示木牌，上面写着：背诵能手我最棒)
(2)看图说话，了解图意：出示古诗插图，让学生说说画的内容。
(3)借助拼音，读准古诗。
(4)夏日的中午，火辣辣的太阳高高地挂着空中，农民伯伯不辞辛苦地在田地里耕种，一滴一滴的汗水从头上滴下来，落在泥土里，粮食来得实在是太不容易了。
今天我们就来学习一首反映农民辛勤劳作的诗，快来读一读。
(5)指导朗读。
①老师范读。
②读准“锄、知、中、餐”这几个字的读音。
③注意诗中的停顿。
④学生与同桌一起练读。
(6)练习背诵古诗，看谁背得快。
(7)谈谈读古诗后的体会。
设计意图：一年级学生活泼好动，对学习的注意力持续时间短。采用活动和游戏的形式，能够极大程度地调动学生的学习热情。巩固学习于活泼有趣的游戏中，让学生在轻松愉悦中学习。
三、课堂小结，拓展延伸
小朋友们，你们个个都是好样的，你们运用自己的聪明才智闯过了一道又一道难关，让我们为自己鼓掌。回家后，一定把你今天的学习收获讲给你的爸爸妈妈听，让他们和你一起分享收获的喜悦吧!
设计意图：激趣促行，鼓励学生将收获讲给家长听，既巩固所学知识，又让学生体会到分享的快乐。
最新人教版一年级上册语文教案2《语文园地五(第二课时)》语文教案
第二课时
一、检查背诵，复习古诗
1.过渡：小朋友们，上节课我们羊羊小队一起连闯四关，你们高兴吗?我们在古诗海洋中采撷的那朵最美的浪花，你们背给爸爸妈妈听了吗?
2.指几名学生背诵，全班齐背。
3.小结：小朋友们背诵得可真好!这节课，老师带你们一起走进故事王国，一起分享一个有趣的故事，好吗?
设计意图：孔子云：温故而知新。对于一年级的学生而言，将背诵过的古诗经常复习，会加深学生永久记忆。
二、初读故事，整体感知
1.学生借助拼音尝试自己读故事，要求读准字音。
读不准的做上标记。2.教师范读，要求学生听准读音。
3.同桌一起读故事，注意读音。
4.教师指导朗读。
5.朗读比赛。
设计意图：《语文课程标准》指出：要让学生充分地读，在读中感知，读中感悟。特别是一年级学生，教师要给予学生信心与鼓励，让他们敢于独立阅读，进而喜欢独立阅读。这样才能将阅读兴趣从课堂引向课外。
三、复述故事，拓展思维
指导学生按下面的提问进行复述。
课件出示：
1.老公公叫谁来帮忙了?(老婆婆)
2.老婆婆叫谁来帮忙了?(小姑娘)
3.小姑娘会怎么说呢?(来了来了)
4.接着谁来了?(小狗)
5.小狗会怎么说呢?(汪汪汪，来了来了)
6.小狗喊谁?(小猫)
7.小猫会怎么说呢?(喵喵喵，来了来了)
8.猜猜看，后来怎么样了?(萝卜拔出来了)
小朋友真棒，有谁能告诉老师，萝卜是谁拔出来的呢?对了，大家一起把萝卜拔出来了，大家的力量真大!
设计意图：利用提问的方式能够有效帮助学生梳理故事脉络，同时在复述过程中更有助于学生对内容的理解。
四、指导表演，感受道理
1.指导学生在小组内尝试表演，提醒学生注意：
(1)拔萝卜的动作和表情。
(2)喊人的动作和对话。
(3)老婆婆、小姑娘、小狗、小猫、小老鼠的走路动作。
2.个别小组上台表演。
设计意图：通过表演可以提高学生的语言表现力，激发学生学习的兴趣。
五、布置作业，分享收获
回家把这个故事读给你最喜欢的人听。
设计意图：孩子都愿意把自己最喜欢的东西与别人分享，知识也不例外。孩子会在分享中加深感悟，激发兴趣。
教学反思
这节课给了我一个重要启示，那就是在今后进行语文园地教学时，要创设学习情境，让学生在情境中学习语文，这样会起到事半功倍的效果。
刚入学的小学生，好动爱玩，思维以形象思维为主。在他们的观察和想象中，客观世界是拟人化的世界，大至一片森林，小至一个小动物，在他们眼里，都是有情感有智慧的精灵。根据学生的这一特点组织教学，也就抓住了教学成功的关键。创设情境的做法尤为适用。本次语文园地的教学就利用孩子最喜欢的《喜羊羊与灰太狼》创设了“羊羊小队PK赛”的情境，让学生进行闯关游戏，极大地调动了学生的学习兴趣。学生在创设的情境中，激起了学习语文的兴趣和热情，轻松完成了巩固音节、区分结构等教学任务，取得了较好的效果。
所以在低年级的语文教学中，我们应该大胆、充分地挖掘生活中的语文课程资源，创造性地使用教材，进行创造性的语文教学活动，这样我们的语文课堂就会真正成为学生学习的乐园。
最新人教版一年级上册语文教案3《影子(第一课时)》语文教案
设计说明
这篇课文以简洁、生动、形象的语言，介绍了影子和人“形影不离”的特点。读起来亲切自然，活泼俏皮。本课教学设计以识字为基础，旨在抓住学生的认知特点，创设一个活泼、有趣的识字氛围，让学生在积极主动的自我发现、自我实践中学知识、用知识，培养学生的创新思维和求异精神。根据课文语言表达亲切自然、生动有趣的特点，让学生在朗读和背诵中感受趣味，抒发自己的独特感受，产生热爱科学、探索生活中的科学的愿望。
课前准备
1.生字卡片，带学生做一次踩影子的游戏，制作多媒体课件。
(教师)2.预习生字，在家长的协助下，在不同的地方，以自己为中心，分辨前、后、左、右。
(学生)课时安排
2课时。
教学过程
第一课时
一、游戏引入，出示课题
1.课前体育游戏：同学们，我们一起到操场上去做“踩影子”的游戏好吗?在踩影子的过程中，大家要注意观察，并思考：你发现了什么?有什么感受?
2.教师和学生一起游戏，边玩边引导学生观察，启发学生发现影子的特点。
再回到课内交流。预设：影子是黑的;影子紧紧跟着人;影子的方向会变化。
3.板书课文题目：影子。
(1)指导学生读课题，注意读好后鼻韵母yǐnɡ，“子”读轻声。
(2)指导识字：你有什么好办法记住“影”这个字?
4.多媒体课件帮助识记：火红的太阳照在建筑物上，在地上形成了影子。
“日”就代表太阳，“京”就代表建筑物，“彡”就代表影子。设计意图：爱玩是孩子的天性。有趣的游戏，能使学生对影子有更感性的认识，从而深刻地体会到语文课的丰富多彩，在愉快的环境中引发学生探求知识的热情。回到课内交流，为学生提供口语交际的空间，热烈的教学气氛为教学创造了一个良好的开端。指导学生在具体的语言环境中识字、学词，增强了学生对识字的信心和成就感。
二、熟读课文，自主识字
1.导学：有一个人和我们一样做过踩影子的游戏。
他还写下了一首儿歌，你们想知道这首儿歌是怎么写影子的吗?请打开书自己读一读吧!(自由读文)2.导问：怎样才能把课文读好呢?
预设：
(1)在读书中遇到不认识的字，可以用笔圈上，请拼音帮忙，也可以请同学帮助，还可以查字典……
(2)把最难读的那一行多读几遍。这样就会越读越流利。
3.教师组织学生自由读课文。
4.创设摘葫芦游戏情境，检查字音，识记生字。
(1)播放课件，师创设情境：同学们，葫芦兄弟来了，它们有了新的名字，就写在它们身上。快看，你叫得出它们的名字吗?(生试读)
(2)开火车，引导学生个别读。
(3)去掉拼音再读生字。
导语：看，葫芦的帽子飞走了，如果你还能准确地叫出它们的名字，那它们就是你的好朋友了。(齐读)
(4)指名摘葫芦，其他学生跟读。
(5)教师进行激励性评价。
设计意图：根据一年级学生的特点，创设游戏情境，增强学生的识字兴趣。
三、方法指导，集中识字
1.过渡：同学们真厉害，这么多生字宝宝都认识了，你是怎样记住这些生字宝宝的呢?
2.学生同桌交流识字方法：和你的同桌说一说吧!
3.教师引导学生汇报识字方法，教师根据学生汇报相机出示新偏旁。
(1)预设：
生1：我用找反义词的方法记住“黑”，“黑”是“白”的反义词。
生2：我用“加一加”的方法记住“狗”，反犬旁加“句”就是“狗”。
生3：我会编童谣：又来了一横和一撇，就是朋友的“友”。
生4：我用换一换的方法记住了“左”和“右”，朋友的“友”右下角的“又”换成“工”念“左”，换成“口”念“右”。“左”和“右”也是一对反义词。
生5：我还找到一对反义词，“前”和“后”也是反义词，我在前面，--×在后面。
(2)师追问：你能说一说你的前、后、左、右都是谁吗?
预设：我的前面是__________，我的后面是____________，我的左面是____________，我的右面是____________。
(3)学生继续汇报。
预设：
生6：我用加一加的方法记住“它”，“宀”加上“匕”就是“它”。
教师相机出示“宀”，教学新偏旁：“宀”是房屋的象形，有“宀”的字一般都与房屋或洞穴有关。说说还见过哪些带有“宀”的字。
(4)辨字：出示三张图片(男、女、动物)，“他、她、它”是我们的好朋友，到底是哪个“他(她、它)”呢?
(5)教师追问：你怎样记住“朋”字?
预设：两个“月”紧紧地挨在一起，就像一对好朋友，我就这样记住了“朋”。
(6)学习新偏旁“月”。
导学：月字旁的字大多数都与身体有关，你还见过哪些月字旁的字?
(7)学习女字旁。
导学：这节课还有一个含有新偏旁的字，谁找到了?请学生观察“女”字与女字旁的区别，说一说“女”字做偏旁时笔画有哪些变化?(横变成了提，与撇相接后笔画不出头。)用加一加的方法识记“好”：女字旁加“子”字就是“好”。
4.小结：加一加、换一换、编童谣、找反义词等都是很好的识字方法，只要我们学会了这些识字方法，以后我们就可以认识很多很多的字了!
5.生字回文，组织学生再读课文，想一想自己原来画出的那个认为难读的句子，现在能读好吗?请在小组内试试。
(组内互读，互相评价)设计意图：“授之以鱼，不如授之以渔。”识字教学是低年级教学的重点，在识字教学中教师要善于引导学生在交流合作的过程中发现多种识字方法，并会运用多种方法识记生字，真正做到举一反三，为以后自主识字打好基础。
四、整体感知，引发思考
1.指名读课文，请同学们边听边想，读懂了什么?
2.根据学生回答相机出示课件，指导观察：影子都像什么?为什么说影子像小黑狗?影子是好朋友?说影子像“小花狗”行不行?为什么?
设计意图：为学生创造大胆发言的机会，引导学生说出自己的独特感受，养成边读书边思考的好习惯。创设情境，让学生真实地体验到影子的特点以及课文语言的形象生动，培养语感，激发学生学语文，用语文的热情。
五、指导写字
1.出示田字格中的“在”字，引导学生观察：看看这个字是由几笔写成的?和“左”比较，有什么不同?(“左”字右下方是“工”字，“在”字右下方是个“土”字，“在”字比“左”字多一笔竖。
)2.教师示范“在”字的写法，学生边观察边书写，把“在”字一笔一笔地写出来。
强调第三笔是竖。3.教师在田字格中范写，请学生仔细观察每一笔的占格位置。
4.练写。
(教师巡视和指导，对个别写得不成功的同学多加指导。)5.展示学生作品，提出意见和建议。
设计意图：通过对比观察，学生发现了“在”字与“左”字的区别，强调了学生书写时的易错之处，避免了学生写错字现象的发生。教师示范板书“在”字的笔顺，带领学生一笔一笔地写下来，不仅提高了学生的观察能力，而且极大地调动了学生写好字的热情。
最新人教版一年级上册语文教案4《影子(第二课时)》语文教案
第二课时
一、复习导入，激发兴趣
1.教师导言：上节课我们学习了《影子》这课的字词，现在我们要进行一个小游戏：小小擂台赛。
看看谁学字词学得好，我们分组进行比赛，大家有信心取胜吗?(1)游戏：开火车。(看拼音读字)
多媒体课件出示生字：影、前、后、黑、狗、左、右、它、好、朋、友。先带拼音读生字，再去掉拼音读生字，开火车读，学生分组读。评价并记录赛读结果。
(2)游戏：捉迷藏。(读词)
多媒体课件出示森林中的场景，许多小动物被树丛遮住了一半，在露出的一半上写有本课的生词。(影子 左右 小黑狗 好朋友 前后 它们)
导学：小动物们在和我们玩捉迷藏的游戏，你能找到它们，并读出它们身上的词语吗?指名读词，学生读对了，隐藏的小动物就从树丛中走出来。
2.过渡：大家都会认读生字宝宝了，现在我们把生字宝宝送到课文中去，你一定会从课文中发现更多有趣的知识。
设计意图：学习汉字是一个反复的、长期的过程，用游戏的方式增加汉字与学生见面的机会，在不断地复习中达到巩固认字的目的。
二、再读课文，深入理解
1.教师导学：请同学们自由读课文，你觉得影子有趣吗?找找你认为影子有趣的句子，画上横线，读一读，并想一想为什么。
2.组织学生边读边画。
3.教师指名读自己找到的句子，并说明自己觉得有趣的理由。
(1)学生读句：“影子常常跟着我，就像一条小黑狗”，请学生说说有趣的理由。
预设：影子真有趣，像个小黑狗一样在自己身前、身后转。
影子就像小狗一样跟着“我”，“我”走到哪里它就跟到哪里。
(2)多媒体课件播放视频：有绿树、小草、小路、小朋友、影子、太阳的动画并配乐。一位小朋友在小路上走着，他的影子跟着太阳变化。
(3)指名再读这一句，教师组织学生评价。
(4)指导学生朗读句子：“影子常常跟着我，就像一条小黑狗。”
①谁能读得更好。(指一名同学读。)说说你打算怎么读?大家还能帮他想想好主意，让他读得更棒吗?
②鼓励学生读课文：有了大家齐心协力出主意，你一定可以读得更好了!试一试吧!
③教师及时评价。
预设：读得真好!听了你的朗读，老师好像真的看到了像小黑狗一样的影子，太可爱了!
④全班一起来读读这么可爱的影子吧!
(5)教师导学：你能学着这种句式说一说吗?
多媒体课件出示句式：
①飘落的树叶就像______________________。
②天上的太阳就像______________________。
③________________就像___________________________________________________。
(6)学生读“影子常常陪着我，它是我的好朋友”。请学生说说觉得有趣的理由。
预设：因为有了影子，就像有了一个新朋友。
影子还会陪“我”，“我”就会感觉好玩了。
(7)教师导学：谁来再读读这一句。你觉得自己读时要注意什么?
预设：要把影子当成好朋友来读。读出喜欢的语气。
(8)指名读句子，并及时评价。
(9)组织学生同桌互读：同桌之间一个同学读时另一个同学认真听。有读得不够好的地方，你可以帮帮他。读得好的就可以向他学习。
4.质疑：想一想学习这篇文章时还有什么不懂的地方。
预设：
影子为什么一会儿在前?一会儿在后?一会儿在左?一会儿在右?
5.过渡：老师和同学们一起再看一遍动画，弄明白影子是怎么变化的。
多媒体课件演示动画，教师旁白：太阳在左，影子在右;太阳在前，影子在后。
影子就像可爱的小黑狗，跟着主人。主人到哪儿它就到哪儿。
影子紧紧跟着人，不分离，就像好朋友一样，常常陪着我。
6.在小组内说一说自己发现的影子的秘密。
预设：
随着太阳方向的改变，影子的方向也会变化。
影子的长短、大小会变化。
影子是追不上的。
我们可以做手影游戏……
7.教师小结：我们通过看动画片知道了影子是黑的，紧紧跟着人，就像好朋友一样，让我们像文中的小朋友一样用欢快的心情再读读课文吧!
(1)齐读。
(2)组与组比赛读。
(3)配乐读：大家读得真好啊，那么还想再读的小朋友可以站起来，配上音乐，让我们美美地读一读!
8.指导学生试背课文：能把你最喜欢的那一句背下来吗?
设计意图：重视朗读，以读为本，边读边演，学生在读中放飞激情，感受祖国语言文字的优美和学习语文的乐趣。在生动的多媒体课件中，学生直观地体验到影子的变化，结合生活经验，在积极的讨论交流和细心的观察中弄明白影子的奥秘，学生的创新精神和思维能力得到了发展。
三、指导书写生字
1.过渡：同学们读得真精彩，有三个生字宝宝被吸引过来了。
它们是谁呢?2.多媒体课件出示“后、好、我”。
指名认读、组词。3.学习生字“我”。
(1)指导学生观察“我”字，用多媒体课件演示笔顺，明确书写顺序。
(2)教学新笔画“斜钩”。教师示范书写。学生练习书写新笔画。
(3)教师示范书写“我”字。学生书写，记住笔顺。
(4)学生练习书写生字“我”，教师巡视指导。
4.学习生字“后、好”。
用多媒体课件演示笔顺，学生书写，记住笔顺。5.引导学生观察：写这两个字时要注意什么?哪一笔最容易错?
预设：“后”中的“口”不与撇相连接。“好”字的第三笔是“提”。
6.练写评比。
生练习书写，师巡视，并提示书写姿势。7.组内展评，夸夸自己或别人的字，学习别人的长处。
设计意图：学习写字，应学会观察、分析字的间架结构和笔画笔顺，养成观察习惯。用多媒体课件演示“后、好、我”的笔顺，用动态的书写让学生留下鲜明的印象，更好地达成指导学生认真观察生字，写好每一笔，每一个字，养成良好的书写习惯的目标。评价以鼓励为主，激发学生写好字的愿望。
四、拓展创新，发展语言
1.过渡：学了这么久，大家都累了，咱们来放松一下吧!看，这是什么?
教师先在大屏幕上投放几个手影，如：大雁飞、小狗叫、小兔蹦……引起学生的兴趣后，问学生：想不想学?(学生做手影游戏)
2.拓展思路：手影游戏真好玩，你还知道有关影子的哪些现象?说一说。
3.画影子。
要注意太阳和影子的位置，画完了评评谁画得好，画得准。设计意图：做手影游戏极大地调动了学生的好奇心，激发了学生探究的愿望。画影子将语文学习和其他学科知识进行整合，使语文学习变成一种综合性学习。同时引导学生走进生活，走进思考。
板书设计
教学反思
1.朗读是培养和提高学生语感的重要途径，也是进一步感受文章所蕴含的情感的常用方法。
课中可以创设多种读的途径，进行朗读训练。如，从对影子的有趣出发，个别读、评议读、男女生比赛读、范读、讨论读、组与组之间比读、用自己喜欢的方式读……多种形式贯穿始终，读中悟，悟中读，使学生参与到读中来，收到以读带讲、以读促思、以读助讲、以读悟情的效果。2.合作互助，理解感悟。
请学生先看完动画，再进行小组交流。在交流中，他们的创新思维、求异思维得到了培养，他们自主发现、自主实践，激发了探求知识的热情。学生回答除了课文中的内容外，还说到“随着太阳方向的改变，影子的方向也会变化”“影子的长短、大小会变化”“影子是追不上的”……并且在接下来的“手影游戏”中，进一步扩展体验，理解影子现象，为学生的思维、语言表达提供平台，让他们真正成为课堂中的主人。最新人教版一年级上册语文教案5《项链(第一课时)》语文教案
设计说明
我们教师只要把语文的课堂教学深入到生活中，把学习语文的快乐释放到生活实际中去欣赏品味，由此再由生活的快乐返回到对语文学习的钟爱和快乐中，不断循环往复!真正让孩子享受学习语文的快乐、生活的丰富多彩，把语文和生活紧紧地联系起来!
在本节课的教学设计中，我特别注重和学生心与心的交流，心与心的碰撞。通过与音乐、美术等学科的整合，不断使主题得以升华，让学生充分感受文中所蕴含的真情。同时，非常尊重学生个性化的发展，最大限度地为学生提供一个可以自我展示的平台：可以自由选择识字方法，可以自由选择读书方式，可以发表自己读文后的独特感受……一切的一切都是为了体现其个性，体现快乐学习。
课前准备
1.词语卡片，生字卡片，制作多媒体课件，投影，歌曲《童年》。
(教师)2.赞美大海的好词佳句，预习生字，朗读课文;
童年玩耍的照片、纪念品、画。(学生)课时安排
2课时。
教学过程
第一课时
一、感受美
1.学生用课前搜集的好词佳句赞美大海。
师：孩子们，你们眼中的大海是什么样子的?能不能用你搜集到的好词好句来描绘一下。
2.引入课文题目。
(教师播放海浪及笑声的录音)师：听，这是什么声音?(海浪声)听，这是什么声音?(笑声)今天让我们下海好吗?脱下鞋子，光着脚丫，一同体验一下踩在松松软软的海滩上是怎样的一种感觉，去感受那里带给我们的快乐。板书课文题目，美读课文题目。
设计意图：本课起始体现了读和说的相互联系，丰富了学生的语言。然后抓住孩子年龄小、爱玩的特点，让他们觉得这节课又要去游玩了，精神先愉悦、轻松起来，让学生对本课学习充满兴趣。
二、领略美
1.课件播放课文内容和朗读动漫。
2.问：大海好玩吗?小娃娃快乐吗?同学们，此时你们想读一读这篇课文吗?自己读一读吧，注意读准字音，再把圈画的字词读一读。
3.标出自然段。
4.同桌分段读一读，纠正读错的字音，再把圈画的字词一起读一读。
设计意图：描画面，想意境，让学生初步感受美，感受快乐，从而大大地激发了学生的阅读愿望和学习兴趣。利用学生的阅读期待，实现学生读的愿望，达到流利读课文的目的。
三、集中识字
1.出示本课生词卡片。
师：词语宝宝来到了我们的黑板上，你们试着认识认识它们。
2.师：选择你喜欢的生字记一记。
3.师：把你记的字和你的同桌说一说，互相学习。
4.师：把你喜欢的字和我们大家说一说吧，其他同学应该认真倾听，并且继续补充。
预设：
形声字：蓝、笑、和、活、金
数笔画：又、向
加一加：蓝、笑、和、娃、挂、活
减一减：又(叉)、白(的)
形近字：娃--挂、贝--见
换一换：着(看)
反义词：笑--哭
同音字：向--象、又--右、和--合
师随机引导：
挂：做动作“挂”。
5.指导书写：(1)白(第一次书写)：先观察“白”字在田字格中的位置;
再仔细看老师范写;学生书写后临写，教师强调每笔的位置和笔顺;学生自己书写一个。(2)和：认识新偏旁“ “。
(3)学生练写”的“”又“。
6.去掉拼音读一读。
7.师：都学会了吗?接受挑战吧!
(开火车检验词语卡片)
(开火车检验生字卡片)
设计意图：识字、写字是一年级语文教学的重点。教师以学生为主体，遵循识字、写字规律，用充满童趣的语言和方式激发学生写字的兴趣。学生先观察，再临帖、再观察、再默写，最终熟练掌握本课会写字。
四、布置作业，课后延伸
找找描写大海的小文章，读一读并能介绍给小伙伴们。
设计意图：作业内容提高了学生搜集资料的能力，提高了阅读能力，同时也丰富了积累。这种开放性的作业，既减轻了学生的课业负担，又在学习方法和习惯上有了方向的指引，这对于一年级的小同学来说是十分有益的。
小学英语教案(篇4)
一、主要内容(Main contents)
Revision
二、学习目标(Objectives)
1、学生能够理解Red light. Stop! Yellow light. Wait! Green light.Go!的含义且能够根据这些指令做出相应的反应。
2、学生能结合前一单元所学习的交通工具名称用Look at … It’s…等句型熟练表达指令和事物的一些特性。
3、学生能熟练运用简单的祈使句Go! Stop! Wait!表达指令。
4、学生能运用形容词fast, slow来对事物的速度进行简单的描述。 5、学生能够使用句型The …isfast/slow.更完整地表述事物的速度，并能用祈使句Look!来引起对方的注意。
6、学生能够朗诵本单元中的英语儿歌。
三、教学建议( Teaching suggestion )
Activity 1 ( Rhyme )
1.学生跟着录音机念儿歌。
2.学生随着节奏，一边念儿歌一边配以动作。
Activity 2 (Game)
Playing the drum
Go! Stop! Wait!
1.教师将Go! Stop! Wait!这三句话写在纸上，摊开在桌上，学生根据教师手中表示Go! Stop!Wait!的指示牌，请一位学生根据看到的指示牌用手在Go! Stop! Wait!这些纸上边说边拍打，如击鼓般。
2.学生在小组中进行游戏。
用游戏让学生动脑动手，激发他们的学习热情，让他们在会说句子的基础上，进行认读句子的操练。
Activity 3 (Quick response )
Red light. Stop!
Yellow light. Wait!
Green light. Go!
1.教师说口令，学生根据口令做出相应的动作。
2.个别学生学做小老师，说出交通灯的颜色，全体学生说出并做出相应动作。
2. 3.以竞赛的形式，男女学生俩俩组合。先由男同学发指令，女同学做出相应的动作，然后由女同学发指令，男同学做出相应的动作。看看男女同学谁的反应快。
小学英语教案(篇5)
我上课的内容是6b unit5 the seasons的第一教时，主要教学四个季节，有关天气的一些词汇以及询问天气方面的一些句型。下面我对这次的教学作以下反思：
一、本节课的优点
1、联系生活实际，注重情景创设
在小学英语教学中要注重创设情景，因为情景既可以满足小学生的心理需要，引起他们的有意注意，还可以让他们从小就明白学习英语是为交际服务的；而且学生在有情景的活动中学习英语，有身临其境的感觉，能加深他们所学英语知识的印象。本单元中“季节与气候”是与实际生活紧密联系的，也是学生所熟悉的。在设计过程中，我制作了课件，首先通过一个有关四季的动画吸引学生的注意力，渲染课堂气氛，让学生感受所要学习的内容是有关四个季节的，同时观察不同季节不同的天气特征，为下面的教学作铺垫。其次，在教学完四季及四季的特征后，我通过一张当天的中国天气预报图，给学生创设一个预报天气的情景，学习“sunny, cloudy, rainy, windy, snowy”这些主要天气特征，并结合句型“what’s the weather like in（城市）?”进行教学，做到词不离句，句不离词，贴近学生的生活实际。为了增加学生的词汇量，我把课文中没有的但十分贴近生活的snowy介绍给了学生。学生在学习这部分的过程中，不仅学到了英语知识，还学到了其他知识。
2、体现任务型教学，增进同学之间的交流
《英语课程标准》提倡任务型教学。任务型教学以任务为目标，要求学生在完成任务也就是学习过程中去建构知识，提高语言运用能力。在新授完四季和天气后，我设计了一张表格，布置了一个调查任务：四人小组间对“你最喜欢哪个季节？在这个季节的天气怎么样？在这个季节你能做什么？”这三个问题进行互相提问并回答。一方面对本课所学的主要单词和句型进行巩固，另一方面为本单元c部分的内容进行提前渗透。在这一环节中，先与一位学生进行示范；而且还注意了反馈时人称的转换，所以调查得很成功，学生们对语言知识能够灵活运用。
3、教学思路清晰，过渡自然，环节紧扣，层层深入，张弛有度。
二、本节课的不足
1.没有处理好单词教学的轻重安排。比如说，hot, cold等一些已学过的单词可以少花点时间，把那些时间放到weather, winter, windy等较难的单词上。
2.没有处理好一些细节。比如：我提问学生what’s the weather like in spring?学生回答了it’s warm.我还在让学生问我。没能即时调整教学思路。
3.板书字太小，对板书的结构还得进一步学习研究。
从设计教案到上完课，这一过程让我体验到了想上一节好课真的不容易，特别是教学天气这一环节时，思路老是不清晰，经过了几次修改，终于能够把这一环节上好，感谢各位老师的指导和帮助，让我感受到了集体的力量是巨大的！我知道，成长的路艰辛的，需要不断地努力学习，刻苦钻研教材，学习新课程，不断地反思自己的教学，才能让自己尽快地成长！
2024英语选修6教案
在这篇文章中我们将为大家揭示一些“英语选修6教案”的内幕。每个老师上课需要准备的东西是教案课件，我们需要静下心来写教案课件。教案是课堂教学的支撑。如果我的答案对你有帮助请不要忘记收藏它！
英语选修6教案【篇1】
Warming-up and pre-reading
1. character n.人物，角色；特性，特征；性格；人格，品性；（汉）字，字体
a. It is a good story, but I find some of the character rather unconvincing(不令人信服).
b. They are twins but they have quite different characters
c. He is a man of good character.
d. A Chinese character 一个汉字
2．Fiction n. 1)小说（总称）；虚构的文学作品
2）编造；想象；虚构；捏造
Fact/Truth is stranger than fiction. [谚语]事实比小说更离奇。
短语：legal fiction 法律上的假定 light fiction 通俗小说
pure fiction 纯粹的谎言；十足的谎言 science fiction 科幻小说
3．Desire vt.1)渴望；希望（做某事）desire to do sth.
2)要求某事（sth.）
3)要求【请求】某人做某事desire that-do/should do
desire sb. to do sth.
a. I desire an immediate answer of yours.
b. We desire to have a good result.
c. Please desire him to come in.
d. They desire that you should come at once.
n. 愿望；欲望；要求；食欲；情欲；向往的东西
短语：at one’s desire照某人的希望 get one’s desire 得到所希望的东西
meet one’s desire 满足某人的欲望 have/feel a great desire for 渴望―――
nurse a desire for 怀有――的欲望
leave much to be desired 有许多改进/不足的地方
leave nothing to be desired 尽善尽美；完全中意
Reading
4.satisfaction n.(opp.dissatisfaction)1）满足；满意；舒服；
2）令人满意的事物
I heard the news with great/much satisfaction.
He smile with satisfaction.
短语：
It will be a great satisfaction to you to know that---你如果听到――一定很满意
Feel/find satisfaction at (in) 对――感到满意
Give satisfaction to 使――满足（满意，称心）
Take satisfaction in 对――感到满足（满意）；乐于――
To one’s satisfaction = to the satisfaction of 使――满意的是
Express one’s satisfaction with(at) 对――表示满意
5. test vt&n. 检验；考查；测验；考试；考验
let’s use another method to test for its pulling force.
词语搭配：an achievement test 成绩测验 a live test(火箭)载人试验
a nuclear test 核试验 a test in physics 物理测试
a test paper一份试卷 a blood test 血液检查
短语：test out 考验 take a test 参加考试
put-to the test 将――加以化验，检查
6。asent adj.(opp. Present) 1)不在的；缺席的；缺勤的
2）缺少的；无
He is absent on business.
He was absent in his mind then.
Long absent soon forgotten. 离久情疏
短语： be absent from a friend 和朋友分离
be absent from (home,school,office)不在（家）；缺（课）；缺（席）；缺（勤）be absent without excuse 擅自缺席
7．Alarm n.警报；惊慌
The fire caused much alarm.
短语：
1） give the alarm = raise an alarm 发警报；向――告急
2） take (the) alarm at 对――感到吃惊
3） a fire alarm 火警
4） in alarm 惊慌；担心
5） sound the alarm 响警报；吹警笛
vt.使警觉；惊动；使惊慌 Don’t alarm yourself.
7)be alarmed at(the news)被（那消息）吓一跳
8）be alarmed for (the safety of--) 放心不下；担心（――的安全）
8．Smooth adj.平坦的；平滑的；顺利的
The course of true love never did run smooth.恋爱无坦途/好事多磨。
The way is now smooth.
Vt. 使――光滑，平坦或顺利
短语：
1）make smooth 弄平滑；扫除障碍 2)smooth out 弄平；铺平；解决
3）smooth away/over 使容易；排除；解决（困难等）
4)smooth the way for 铺平道路；排除障碍；使容易做
5)smooth down （使）平静下来；弄平
9.embarrass vt. To cause to feel ashamed, uncomfortable or anxious 使困惑；使局促不安
The decline of sales embarrassed the company.
Be/feel embarrassed in the presence of strangers
短语：embarrass sb. with sth./by doing sth. 做――使某人尴尬/害羞/窘迫
Don’t embarrass them with(by asking) personal questions.不要问隐私，会让他们觉得不好意思。
Embarrassed adj. 尴尬的，难堪的，害羞的
I was embarrassed by his comments about my clothes.
Embarrassing adj.使人尴尬的；令人难堪的
What has been your most embarrassing moment？
10.sympathy n.同情；同感；同情心
Out of sympathy for the homeless children he gave them shelter for the night.
短语：1）express sympathy for 慰问
2）feel sympathy for, have sympathy for 同情
3）in sympathy with 同情；赞成；跟着；和――一致
11.accompany 伴随；陪伴；同时存在或发生
I must ask you to accompany me to the police station.
Strong winds accompanied by heavy rain.
12. ring(sb.)up = call (sb.) up 给某人打电话
打电话的相关短语：
1) give sb. a call/ring 2)make a (telephone) call
3) call sb. on the telephone 4) phone/telephone sb.
挂断电话的相关短语：ring off ring off the telephone
回电话的相关短语：call bake ring back
13.turn around 转身；回转；旋转
When the teacher turned around, they began to whisper.
All of a sudden he turned around/about and saw me.
短语：trun about转身；转向；调向 turn against背叛；反抗；使对抗
turn away 把（脸）转过去；抛弃 turn off解雇；关掉；使失去兴趣
turn on打开 trun out结果是；证明是；生产（产品）
14．There stood-此句为存在结构，常用于这种结构的动词有：stand, seem to be, happen to be, be likely to be; live, come, enter, lie 等；
There happened to be nobody in the room.
Once there lived an old fisherman in a village by the sea.
15. declare vt.宣布；声明；表明；说明；宣称
1) declare + n.宣告 They will declare the results of the election soon.
2) declare + n + (to be)n./ adj. 宣布――为――
The judge declared him (to be) the winner of the competition.
I declared this conference (to be) open.
3) declare + (that)从句 宣称；声称
She declared (that) she was right.
短语：
Declare oneself 发表意见，表明态度 declare war on/upon 对――宣战
Declare against 声明反对 declare for (in favour of )声明赞成
16．Envy vt.& n.嫉妒；羡慕
1) envy +sb. (for sth.) 2)envy sb. Sth.
How I envy you！ They envied us for our success.
I envy you your good fortune.
短语： be in envy of one’s success 羡慕某人的成功
Out of envy 出于嫉妒/羡慕
17．Leave--- alone 不管；别惹；让――独自待着；不打扰
Leave my book alone. 不要动我的书。
Let me alone to do it. 由我做吧。
Using language
18. explanation n. (其后常跟of, for ) 解释，注释；说明
She’s giving an wxplanation of how the machine works.
1) by way of explanation 作为说明，以解释的方式
2) come to an explanation with sb.与人交谈后消除了误会
3) In explanation of 解释，说明
I had better say a few words by way of explanation.
I’ve come to an explanation with them about the matter.
Have you anything to say in explanation of your conduct?
19．Take ---seriously 严肃对待；认真对待
You can’t take his promise seriously; he never keeps his word.
20.divorce n. 离婚；断绝关系 vt. 与――离婚； 使――离婚；脱离
1)The judge divorced the couple.
2)He got divorced from his wofe last month.
3)He is divorced from societ.
4)Life and art cannot be divorced.
短语： get/obtain a divorce 获准离婚
a divorce between thought and action 思想与行动脱节
divorce oneself/be divorced from one’s spouse 和自己的配偶离婚
Learning tip
21. set aside 将――放在一边；保留；储蓄（时间；金钱）；忽视/不顾（要求、感受）
So set aside some time each day to write, even if it is only five minutes.
I’ve set aside some money for the journey.
She always sets aside my feelings.
短语：set about 着手；开始 set--against 使――和――为敌/对立
Set apart = set aside 留出；拨出
英语选修6教案【篇2】
一、听音，选择你听到的词或词组，将其序号填在( )里。(10分)
( ) 1、A. because B. best C. birthday
( ) 2、A. climb mountains B. cook dinner C. clean the room
( ) 3、A. sunny B. Sunday C. funny
( ) 5、.A. first B. third C. fourth
( ) 6、A. plant trees B. play sports C. play the piano
( ) 7、A. spring B. summer C. swim
( ) 9、A. window B. winter C. windy
( )10、A. May 11th B. May 1st C Mar. 1st
二.听录音，根据你所听到的内容，用1.2...给下列图片排序，(10分)
三.听录音，根据问句选择最合适的答句，将序号填在括号里(10分)
( ) 2、A. I often watch TV . B. I like P.E.
( ) 3、A. Spring B. fish C. Monday
( ) 4. A. It’s March 8th. B. It’s June 1st. C. It’s October 1st
( ) 5 A. Because I can skate. B. Because I can plant trees
C. Because I can swim.
四、听录音，写出所缺的单词(10分)。
1.I___________ ____________ at 6:30.
2.I often _________ _________ on Sundays.
3.I like ________, because I can ________.
4.My birthday is in ________.My mother’s birthday is in __________.
5.We can _______ _________ together next Sunday.
( ) 2. A. wait B. curtain C. play
( ) 4. A. green B. glue C. glass
( )1、I often do my homework ___ 9:00 in the evening
( )2、What do you do _______ the weekend?
( )3、What's the date today? It's November _____
( )4、My birthday is December .
( )5、season do you like best ? ——Spring .
( )6、----_______ Why do you like winter ?
---- Because I can skte.
( )7、When your birthday ?
( )8、______ she have a book?.
( )9、spring we can fly a kite in the sky .
( )10、February is the month of a year .
( )1、What do you do on the weekend? A. No，it’s in July
( )2、What’s the date today? B. I usually do homework
( )3、Which season do you like best? C. Because I can play with snow
( )4、Why do you like winter? D. I like winter.
( )5、Is your birthday in June? E It’s January 6th
Hello. I’m a student. I get up at 6:30.I go to school at 7:30.
I ______ _______ _______ at 9:30.I have _________
_________ at 10:00.After school I ________ ________ at 4:30.
In the evening I _________ ________ . I often ______ ______ ______
My name is Jack. I’m 15 years old, my birthday is in November. Usually I goto school at 7:10 and have four classes in the morning. In the afternoon ,I havetwo classes. I like playing football ,I often play football after school. On myweekend, I often read books, do my homework and watch TV. My favourite season issummer ,because I can swim .
( ) 1.Jack’s birthday is in November。
( ) 2. Jack has 4 classes in a day.
( ) 3. Jack often plays football on the weekend.
( ) 4. Jack’s favourite season is summer
( ) 5.On the weekend, Jack often plays football, does homework and readsbooks.
同学们，你在周末经常做些什么事情呢?是待在家，帮父母做家务，还是出去游玩?请以“My Weekend“为题，写一写自己的周末活动，至少五句话。
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
英语选修6教案【篇3】
单元重点内容与教学目标
本单元的中心话题是诗歌。听说读写等语言知识和语言技能主要围绕“诗歌”这一主题设计的。文中涉及诗歌的韵律、节奏，并介绍了几种简单的不同内容和形式的诗歌。本单元引导学生讨论这些内容，目的在于让他们了解诗歌的一些基本特征和写作方法，自己尝试写简单的诗歌，并学会欣赏这些优美的文学作品。
Warming up部分围绕诗歌这一话题设置了两个练习。第一个练习引导学生回顾儿时所接触的诗歌；第二个练习引导学生探讨写诗的目的。
Pre-reading 部分主要让学生认识诗歌的种类和不同国家所赋诗歌的文化差异。该部分设置了两个练习，第一个练习让写诗交流所喜爱的诗歌；第二个练习就阅读课文设计图表，让写诗从内容和写作风格两个方面认识阅读课文中的诗歌。
Reading 部分介绍了五种简单的英语诗歌共8首：儿歌节奏明快，韵律和谐、朗朗上口、不断重复、利于记忆，是语言学习的有效手段；清单诗，尤其是那些不断重复短语和节奏的诗歌，比较容易创作。五行诗，顾名思义，由五行组成，寥寥数语，言简意赅。俳句起源于日本，由17个音节组成。唐诗，被英国等所借鉴，许多唐诗被译成英文，广为传诵。
Comprehending部分的真重点放在文中的几首诗歌上，要求提炼诗歌的主题，练习1要求选择自己喜爱的诗歌进行评述，练习2与3是对诗歌进行更深入地理解。通过诵读感受押韵和节奏。
Learning about language部分安排的两个练习均与诗歌有关。第一个练习通过从课文诗歌中找押韵的词帮助学生理解课文的生词和诗歌的韵脚；第二个练习学习构词发。语法部分设置了两种类型的练习。一类写诗或续诗；另一类是用所给词的适当形式填空。这两个练习都是操练虚拟语气的用法。
Using language 部分综合训练听说读写的语言能力。听、读和讨论部分把听力与阅读训练结合起来。通过听理解诗歌内容，辨认写诗人的身份、诗歌的节律，并表达诗歌所激起的联想。通过边打拍子边朗读、在欣赏中加深对诗歌的理解。通过释义理解诗歌中的难句，并指导学生进行深层理解，学会推断人物身份与关系。听和讨论部分有四个学生与老师交谈，围绕诗歌比赛展开。首先通过不同的声音来辨认人物；然后，捕捉不同人的不同事，一一对号。该部分的两个练习，帮助学生学习和运用表达意图与决定的日常交际用语。写的部分要求学生模仿诗歌C以IF I开头写清单诗；或以I FEEL HAPPY WHEN。。。开头写诗。
Summing up部分运用调控策略，对本单元所涉及的知识与技能，特别是本单元所涉及的结构和词汇、话语功能以及诗歌的类型、押韵和节奏等方面进行自我评价。
Learning tip部分提示学生注意理解诗歌与应用学习的关系：写诗、唱歌是理解和记忆词汇，学习语言的有效方法。
教学设计
第一课时：Warming up, Pre-reading & Reading 本课时内教师可从学生的生活实际出发，了解人们写作英语诗歌的不同目的，借助教材第9页的表格，Reading部分的诗歌进行整体理解。建议以理解内容为主。可以选择其中某一首诗，进行语音训练，感受英语诗歌的节奏和韵律。
第二课时：Reading, Comprehending & Learning about language (Discovering useful words and expressions ). 本课时内主要是对课文进行适当的拓展、讨论，着眼于对英语诗歌的欣赏，理解这些诗歌的寓意。利用 Learning about language 中的Discovering useful words and expressions 部分，引导学生注意并感受英语诗歌的韵律。
第三课时：Learning about language (除Discovering useful words and expressions) 课堂上处理完该部分内容，突出两个重点：（1）学习诗歌的写法； （2）学习与过去事实相反的虚拟语气的用法。
第四课时：Using language 完成阅读、听力和讨论及写作部分。
第五课时：Summing up & Assessment小结、测试与讲评。
Period 1 Warming up, Pre-reading & Reading
Teaching goals
1． Target language
a. Important words and phrases
Poem, poetry, recite, aspect, convey, nursery, rhyme, diamond, cottage, balloon, sparrow, tease, salty, endless, translate, nursery rhyme, take it easy, run out of, make up of
b. Important sentences
Which poem is about things that don’t make sense?
Poets use many different forms of poems to express themselves.
I hadn’t taken my eye off the ball.
We hadn’t taken it easy.
The poem is made up of five lines.
A lot of Tang poetry has been translated into English. The translations have a free form that English people like to copy.
2. Ability goals
a. Enable Ss to talk about different types of poems: nursery rhymes; list poems; cinquain,; haiku; Tang poems
b. Enable Ss to talk about different purposes of writing poems.
c. Understand the main theme of each poem.
d. Enable Ss to chant some of their favorite poems.
3. Learning ability
Enable Ss to distinguish different types of poems.
Teaching important points
1. Talk about five main types of poems.
2. Understand the main purpose of writing the poems.
Teaching difficult points
1. Find the rhythm of each poem.
2. Chant the poem.
3. Understand the main purpose of writing the poems.
Teaching methods
1. Skimming and scanning.
2. Asking-and –answering activity
3. Discussion
4. Chant
Teaching aids
Multimedia
Teaching procedures & ways
Step 1. Greetings
Step 2. Presentation
Ask Ss to think back and try to remember poems from their early childhood, either in Chinese or in English.
Talk about some famous poets both home and abroad, either ancient ones or modern ones.
Brainstorming: What will you think of when we talk about the word “poem”?
Step 3. Warming up
Read the questions in this part, reminding Ss what they notice about the above poems.(e.g. they have a strong beat, or they have rhyme, or they play with words and sounds, or perhaps some of them are funny because they make no sense.)
Tell Ss that there are many reasons why people write poetry. Give the examples on the Bb. Ask Ss why they think the poets wrote the poems they have just recited.. Write their suggestions on the board.
Give Ss a time limit of a few minutes. Divide the class into groups of four to discuss the purpose of writing poems. Ask one person from each group to read their group’s list and add their suggestions to the list on the board. (Suggested reasons: to create certain feelings or images in the reader; to share a feeling or experience; to describe something in detail or give an impression; to get the reader to think about an idea; to express a point of view; to make the reader experience the sight, sounds, smells, feel and tastes of something; to create a mood, to play with words--- their sounds, rhyme and rhythm.)
If time permits, in small groups or as a class, discuss the kinds of topics that poets write about.( people, animals, nature, landscapes, the sea, the seasons, stories, death, war, youth and old age, feeling and experiences, emotions like love, hate, sadness, regret and desire, etc.)
Step 4. Pre-reading
People from different countries write different kinds of poems. Get Ss to discuss the questions on Page 9 with their partners: Do you have a favorite poem in Chinese? Why ? Do you have a favorite poem in English? Why?
As to exercise 2, give Ss practice in an important reading skill: scanning a text, that is, looking through a text quickly to find specific information. Read the table in exercise 2 with the Ss. Tell them that they are going to look for the information in the table, just in the poems themselves, not in the other parts of the text. They are to look only for those pieces of information and not read every word. Do an example with them.
Suggested answers to exercise 2:
Which poem A B C D E F G H
describes a person? √
tells a story? √
describes an aspect of a season? √ √ √
is about sport? √
is about things that don’t make sense? √
is recited to a baby? √
describes a river scene? √
has rhyming words at the end of lines? √ √
repeats words or phrases? √ √ √
Step 5. Reading
Scanning
Get the Ss to read the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the Ss to form a good habit of reading. Teacher gives Ss a couple of minutes to look through the whole passage. Tell them to read the text silently and then ask some detailed questions about the text on the slide show . Teacher should encourage Ss to express their ideas.
Q1. Why do people write poetry?
Q2. How many forms of poems are mentioned in the passage? What are they?
Q3. What does “nursery rhyme” mean? Why do they delight small children?
Q4. What’s the characteristic of “list poems”? What about “cinquain”?
Q5. Why do English People like “Haiku”?
Q6. Are you familiar with Tang Poems? Do you know the title of the last poem in the text?
Listening
Before Ss read the text, have them close their books and listen to the text with their eyes closed. This gives Ss the opportunity to listen to the sounds or “music” of the poems before reading them in detail. Tell them that it doesn’t matter if they don’t understand every word.
First reading
Get Ss to read the text carefully, finding the one sentence that sums up the paragraph of each part.. Underline the topic sentence.
Second reading
Tell Ss that they are going to look at the rhythm of two of the poems. Make sure they know what rhythm is. Read the limerick aloud and have Ss listen for the strong beats. Then have them clap the strong beats as you read. Mark the strong beats on the limerick on the board.
There was an old man with a beard
Who said “it is just as I feared”.
“Four insects and then
Two birds and a hen
Have all made a home in my beard”.
Now read the poem A & B. Ask them to mark the strong beats on the two poems that have a strong rhythm. Check their answers . Then play the tape and get them to clap to the strong beats in those two poems.
Third reading
Just as any scene can serve as the subject of a painting, so any part of daily life can provide material for a poem.. Of course, the choice that the artist or poet makes relates to his or her purpose. Poetry is usually short and compact, so it should be read several times, preferably aloud, to appreciate its meaning. Read the last poem (Poem H), and answer the following questions:
Q1. What parts of the poem suggest that the woman loves her husband?
Q2. How do you understand the sentence” Should the journeyer return, this stone would utter speech.”? Explain the sentence in your own words.
Q3. What picture do you have in your mind when you read the above sentences?
Q4. Do you know the Chinese title of this poem? Do you know the Chinese version of the poem?
Step 6. Make a short summary of this period.
Homework
1. Surf some websites to find out more information about poets.
2. Review the content of the reading passage.
3. Finish the exercises on Page 12& 13.
Period 2 Reading, Comprehending & Learning about language
Teaching goals
1． Target language
Important words and phrases
joy, anger, sorrow, thread, appropriate, ending, compass
2. Ability goals
Enable Students to deepen their understanding of the reading passage and learn some useful words and expressions.
Learn to use words and expressions in their right form.
3. Learning ability
Enable Ss to understand the rhyme and rhythm in English poems.
Teaching important points
1. Understand the passage and answer the questions about it.
2. Learn the useful words and expressions in the passage.
Teaching difficult points
1. Discuss the poems and understand their deep meaning.
2. Find the rhyme and rhythm in English poems and try to create them by students themselves.
Teaching methods
Discussion, asking-and-answering activity, practice, task-based activity
Teaching aids
Multimedia
Teaching procedures & ways
Step 1. Greeting
Step 2. Comprehending
Task 1. Group work
Ask students to read the passage together and then discuss in group which poem they like best and give reasons.
After discussion, ask someone to present his/her idea to the class.
Task 2. Ask and answer
Answer the questions about the passage on Page 11 – 12.
Step 3. Explanation
1. Others try to convey certain emotions.
“convey” here means communicate (an idea, meaning, etc.).
I can’t convey how angry I feel.
“emotion” means strong feeling
Love and hatred are basic emotions.
His voice was shaking with emotion.
2. They delight small children because they have strong rhythm and rhyme.
“delight” means make sb. pleased greatly.
The gift of the child delighted his parents.
I am delighted to help you.
“rhythm” means a measured flow of words and phrases in verse determined by various relations of syllables.
the exciting rhythms of African drum music
“rhyme” means identity for sound between words or the endings of words, esp. in verse.
Shakespeare sometimes wrote in rhyme.
He made up funny rhymes to make us laugh.
3. We would have won if we hadn’t taken it easy.
“take it easy” means to proceed gently or carefully; to relax and avoid overwork.
You’ve done quite enough work for today; now take it easy for an hour.
4. We would have won if we hadn’t run out of energy.
“run out(of sth.)” means to use up; to come to an end.
The petrol is running out.
We are running out of out time. = Our time is running out.
5. a poem made up of five lines
“make sth. up” means to put together; to compound
What are the qualities that make up his character?
Society is made up of people of widely differing abilities.
Step 4. Learning about language
Check the exercise on Page 12-13.
Task 1. Discovering useful words and expressions
1. Ask some students to list the words they find to rhymes with the words in the exercise. The teacher may make some addition if necessary.
Sample answers:
2 high sky pie my fly shy lie
3 sing ring wing thing king fling string
4 today away say play lay tray may
5 lace race face case chase place pace
6 true too new flew few shoe canoe
Ask students to try to create more lists by themselves.
2. Complete the passage using the correct words.
Ask students to finish the passage and explain why the form of the words must be changed.
Task 2. Discovering useful structures
1. Rewrite the poem about winning the match and the reasons.
2. Rewrite the poem about the attempt to win the competition.
Offer students some time to discuss about it and present some samples for them to follow if they find it difficult to get through.
3. Match the sentences.
Explain some rules of subjunctive mood if necessary.
4. Complete the sentences using the correct forms of the verbs.
Step 5. Using words and expressions(Workbook)
Task 1. Make adjectives from nouns by adding suffix “ful” and then explain the meaning of the new adjectives. Encourage students to think of more examples that have the same form.
Task 2. Complete the table with the correct words.
Noun Verb Adjective Adverb
Task 3. Complete the sentences using the correct word from the table.
Task 4. Match the phrases appropriately and encourage students to create more of their own word pictures.
Step 6. Make a short summary of this period.
Homework
1. Remember important language points.
2. Write a simple English poem by using rhyme and rhythm.
3. Preview “Learning about language”.
Period 3 Learning about Language
Teaching goals
1． Target language
a. Important words
Appropriate , ending , compass
b. Important sentences
If she had stueide harder , she would have passed the exam.
If she had been there , she would have met some really interesting people.
2. Ability goals
a. Enable Ss to grasp the ways of writing poems.
b. Enable Ss to use subjunctive mood correctly.
3. Learning ability
Teach Ss how to write some poems and how to use subjunctive mood correctly.
Teaching important points
1. the way of writing poems.
2. Subjunctive Mood
Teaching difficult points
Using subjunctive mood correctly in different situations.
Teaching methods
1. Task-based learning
2. instructions
3. practice
Teaching aids
Multimedia
Teaching procedures & ways
Step 1. Greetings
Step 2. Warming up
Task1: Free talk------ why do you enjoy learning English?
T: I’m glad to see you again and I’m happy because we can enjoy English together. Do you enjoy learning English?
S: Yes . Because English is a very beautiful language.
S2: Because we can enjoy a lot of funny stories if we know English.
S3: Because we can communicate with foreigners in English.
S4: Because we can introduce China to foreigners if we know English.
S5……
T: Well done. If we did well in some way , people would know us. Now let’s talk about some famous persons. (Yao Ming , Liu Xiang , Madame Curie, Yuan Longping, Chinese Women Football Team)
Step 3. Presentation
Task2: Group talk-----Try to talk about the famous persons.
Q1: Why is Yao Ming famous ? S1: Because he played basketball very well. S2:…..
Q2: Why could Liu Xing succeed ? S1: Because he trained very hard. S2:……..
Q3: Why did Chinese Women Football Team lose the game? S1: Because they were tired…
Q4: Complete the sentence : They would win if they ……… S1:They would win if they had a good rest. S2:……
T: Just now we talked a lot about some persons .If we put these sentences together , they formed a kind of poem-----list poems..
Task3: Turn to page 13 , and do exercises 1 and 2.
Step 4. Grammar
Task4: Present some sentences on the blackboard , and ask Ss to tell the difference among them.
a. If I knew it , I would tell you.
b. If I had known it yesterday , I would have told you .
c. If I had known it , I would have told you.
d. If I had finished my homework , I would have gone to bed.
e. If I had known his telephone number , I would have made a phone to him.
S1: In these sentences , they use different tenses.
S2: They describe different situations.
S3:…………
T: Yeah . We can draw a conclusion as follows:
Verb forms
If –clause The main sentence
The present situation Ved would /could/should/might +V
The past situation had Ved would/could/should/might +have Ved
Task5: Compare some special sentences and draw a conclusion.
A. Had I not seen it with my own eyes , I would not have believed it.
Were it not to rain tomorrow , we would have a picnic.
Should it rain tomorrow , we would have a picnic.
Conclusion: connect subjunctive mood with inversion.
B. If the weather had been finer, the crops would be growing still better.
If you had followed the teacher’s advice, you wouldn’t be in hospital.
Conclusion: The situations in the clause and the main sentence are different.
C. If only I knew his name!
If only we had followed your advice!
If only I could see him again!
Conclusion: We should use different forms of verbs according to the different situations in the pattern: If only.
D. Without sunlight, people’s life would be different from today.
But for your help, I wouldn’t have finished the work.
Conclusion: If there are some special prepositions just like without , but for in the sentences, we sometimes should use subjunctive mood.
Step5. Practice
Task6 : Do exercises 3 and 4 on page13.
Task7: Present some pictures and ask Ss to make up some sentences with subjunctive mood.
Picture1: A rocket
e.g If I were a designer , I would design a spaceship .
If I were clever enough , I would have designed a spaceship.
Picture2: the universe
e.g.:If I were an astronaut , I would travel into space.
If I had been to space , I would have known what were there in space.
Picture3:a lot of money
e.g.:If I had a lot of money , I would run a big company.
If I had earned a lot of money , I would have built a lot of houses for the poor
Picture 4:the farmer and the snake
e.g.:If the farmer hadn’t seen the snake , he wouldn’t have put it in the arms.
If he hadn’t put it in the arms , the snake wouldn’t have bitten him.
If the snake hadn’t bitten him , he wouldn’t have died
Task8: Do some exercises on screen.
Step6: summary and homework
Do exercises 1-4 on page 50 and 51.
Period 4 Reading , Listening and Writing
Teaching goals
1. Target language
a. key words and phrases: pattern, rhythmic, rhyme, rhythm, sunlight, darkness, warmth, underlined, load
b. key sentences:
I’m not going to do….
I plan to do…
I’ll do….
I am looking forward to do…..
If I were the ruler of the world, I would do….
If I had a million dollars, I would do….
I feel happy when….
Slowly the moon climbs in the sky….
2. Ability goals
a. Enable the students to understand the rhyme and rhythm of the poem and grasp the main idea.
b. Enable the students can get the information from the long passage by listening.
c. Enable the students can express their feelings by writing poems.
3. Learning ability goals:
a. Enable the students to know how to get the key words to understand the poem.
b. Enable the students can find where the rhyme and the rhythm of the poem are.
c. Help the students learn how to get some skills in listening.
d. Enable the students to learn to present enough reasons to support their opinions.
e.. Help the students learn to write poems using the target language according to the writing steps.
4.Teaching important points
a. Help the students to understand what the rhyme and rhythm are.
b. Train the students to get the key words by reading the question before listening.
c. Teach the students to write according to the writing steps.
5.Teaching difficult points
a. How to help the students can find where the rhyme and the rhythm of the poem are.
b. How to help the students to make up dialogues, using the target language.
c. How to help the students to write the poem to express their feelings.
6.Teaching methods
Cooperative learning and Task-based learning
7.Teaching aids
A recorder, computer, slide and blackboard
8.Teaching procedure & ways:
Step1 Greetings and revision
Teacher greets the whole class and checks the homework.
Task1.Rhyme
Teacher asks the whole class to enjoy a poem (showing it on the screen by computer)
There was an old woman they say;
Who would eat an apple a day;
When asked she replied;
It’s good for my inside;
For I am never ill anyway.
Teacher asks some questions:
Question1: Do you think poem is funny? What is main idea of the poem?
(To tell us an apple is good for our health)
Question2: Could you find the rhyme of the last word in each line?
(say//day; replied//inside; anyway)
The rhyme in this poem is “a a// b b //a ”.
Task 2 .Rhythm
Enjoy a song----Little Stars
Teacher asks the students to listen to and follow it. After that, teacher asks them to find the rhyming words and share them. This time teacher tells students the poem not only has rhyme, but also has the rhythm so that people can sing it as well as read it.
Step2 pre-reading
Teacher tells the students they will learn a new poem which is also a song written by Rod McKuen and asks the students to listen to the poem to feel and think about.
Task1. Speaking
Show some questions on the screen before students listen.
1.Do you think the speaker in the poem is more like to be a girlfriend /boyfriend or a parent?
2.Does the poem have a rhythmic pattern?
3.Does the poem have rhyming words?
After listening to the poem, the students have some minutes to speak and share their opinions.
Task2.Discussion
Open question: When you were listening to the poem, did it make you feel something or think about something? What did it make you feel or think about?
This question has no standard answers , the students can discuss and express what they think freely.
Step3 While -reading
Teacher asks the students open their books and turn to page14.
Task1 Read the text following the tape.
Teacher asks students to follow the poems in their books while listening to the tape again and asks them to read aloud in pairs.
Task 2 Find the words that rhyme and circle them.
Teacher asks students to find and circle the rhyming words and list them on the blackboard to share.
Task3 Clap the strong beats of the rhythm
Teacher writes the first four lines on the board, and asks students to listen for the strong beats. Teacher plays the first four lines of the tape more than one time until the students are confident of hearing the strong beats and tap their tables in time to the strong beats. Teacher asks some students to underline the strong beats on the board and the teacher will tell them the correct answers by oral. After doing the example, the whole class will be divided into small groups and each group chooses one paragraph of the rest poem to underline the strong beats and reads them aloud. Some minutes later, teacher will check it in class.
Step4. Post –reading
Teacher sets exercises 3 (on page 15) on the screen and asks students to discuss the poem’s meaning in more detail. After that, teacher will tell each group to present the group’s views to the class.
Question1: Who is the speaker in the poem and who is he/she speaking to? Give reasons to support your answer.
Question2: Which of the following is the closest to the speaker’s message? Give a reason for your choice.
A .If it’s cold, I’ll warm you; if it’s dark, I’ll give you light; if you’re hungry, I’ll feed you; if you want love, I’ll give it to you.
B. Although the future may be difficult for you, whenever you need warmth and love, remember I’ll have some to give you.
C. While you’re away I’ll remember your smile and I’ll love you always. When you return, I hope you will love me.
Suggested answers.
Answer1 :A partner (mother or father) speaking to a young adult child(son or daughter)
Many of the phrases imply that the speaker is an older person who has experienced their own journey through life and who is offering love to the young person to help him/her begin his/her journey through life. For example, I’ve saved the summer …and I’ve saved some sunlight….when the speaker says Till you’re older….
We know that the speaker is probably a parent because he/she is offering the child unconditional love ( But if you’ve a need for love, I’ll give you al I own.).we know that son/daughter is a young adult because the speaker refers to the time when you were but nineteen.
Answer2: B is the best answer.
Step5 Pre-listening
Teacher tells students the listening is a conversation between a teacher and three of her students about a poetry competition. the students talk about when they are going to write their poems and how they become inspired to write poetry. Their discussion illustrates the function of intention.
Teacher first asks the students to discuss the following questions in groups about their experiences writing Chinese poetry.(show these questions by computer)
Question1: In what kind of place do you like to write poetry?
Question2: What conditions do you need to be able to write poetry? ( Does it have to be quite ,do you need to be alone, do you need to listen to music and so on?)
The discussion gives a context for the listening, prepares them for what they will hear and will help them understand the listening more easily.
Step6 Listening
Task1 First listening
Teacher reads the exercise1 with students before they listen and asks them whether ,in their discussion, any of them likes to write poetry under the same conditions as Lucy, Tom or Jack(ie in the countryside, at home, listening to music ).
As students listen, they should circle the correct student’s name in Exercise1.Check the answers together. (suggested answers: 1.Lucy;2. Jack;3.Lucy; 4.Tom)
Task2. Second listening
Teacher asks students to listen to the tape again , more than 2 times if possible. Exercise 2 asks more detailed questions. Teacher can reform and design the different forms of these question so that students will be more interested in them.
Exercises:
A. Multiple Choices
1.When do the students have to have their poems completed? (B)
A. By the 23th of the month B. By the 24th of the month C. By the 20th of the month
2. Who had decided not to write a poem for the competition but then changed is or her mind? (C)
A. Lucy B. Jack C. Tom
B. True or False
1.Lucy is satisfied with the poem she has written. (F)
Explanation: She thinks that if she had an extra week to work on it, she could improve it.
2.Tom has used music before while studying. (T)
Explanation: he works best when he is listening to his favorite music, but he has never tried writing poetry to music.
C. Complete the sentences
1. Why does Jack like to go into the countryside to write?
Because he finds that he notices all sorts of the things and he has interesting thoughts.
2. Why does Lucy stay at home to write?
Because she likes the quiet and likes to have her own things around her.
Task3 Third listening
This time the students are listening for a different kind of detail. They must listen for the expressions listed in Exercise 3.These sentences are model ways of expressing intention.
A. Filling the blanket
Teacher asks students close their books and show the sentences on the screen. Then Teacher plays the tape again and asks the students listen for these sentences.
1___________ enter a poem this.(I’m not going to)
2. ___________ do it this weekend.(I plan to)
3.How_____________become inspired to write this weekend?(are you going to)
4.__________________go on a hike into the countryside and sit quietly somewhere by myself.(I am going to)
5.____ also try out his way some time.(I’ll)
6.________________ try it tonight.(I ‘m going to)
7.__________________________ reading all your poems.(I’m looking forward to)
Check the answers together.
B. Repeating and Practicing
Imagine that the class has to enter poems in a competition next week. In small groups discuss the question :How are you going to become inspired to write your poem?
Teacher asks students to use some of the expressions in Exercise3 to talk about their plans. Students practise by oral and share in pairs.
Step 7 Writing
Task1.Revise the grammar
Students work in groups. Write a list poem starting with If I like poem C on page 10.write one line each .It doesn’t have to rhyme. Each group can choose one of these lines to start their group poem. Then share these poems in class.
Sentences pattern:
1. If I were the ruler of the world, I would….
2. If I had a million dollars, I would…
3. If I had taken your advice, I would have/wouldn’t have…
Task2 Write a poem
Teacher asks students to write a poem that starts with I feel happy when .The lines do not have to rhyme. Or write a poem that starts with Slowly. Start each line with Slowly and make each pair of lines rhyme. To show the students what to do, teacher list the first four lines of the two poems. Now teacher asks students to write own poem of eight to ten lines.
Eg: A
I feel happy when…
The sky is blue,
You smile at me with your sparking black eyes,
It’s my birthday.
Eg B
Slowly the moon climbs in the sky,
Slowly the black-tailed bird lets out a cry,
Slowly the dog crosses the road,
Slowly the old man carries his load.
If time permitting, the teacher asks students to finish their poems and share in class. If not, the task 2 of writing can be as homework.
Step8 Summary
In this period, all the students revise the key points of a poem-----Rhyme and rhythm. And they also enjoy a beautiful poem ----I’ve saved the summer. Students can understand the deep meaning in the poem and the parents’ love to the children. It’s good to help students how to appreciate poems. Meanwhile, Listening is important. Students enhance their listening skills by a conversation about the poems competition. In the end part, writing exercises helps students review the grammar and give them chances to express their thoughts by poem.(Teacher makes a list of some important points on the blackboard.)
Stop 9 Homework
1. Finish their poems after class.
2. Reread the poem “I’ve saved the Summer” and appreciate the beauty of the poem.
3. Make more sentences with If I had done….., I would….
Period5 Summary
Teaching goals
1.Target language
All useful words and structures in this unit.
2. Ability goals
a. Help students master the usage of the words and expressions in the unit.
b. Translate some sentences on Page 51.
c. Enable students to summarize what they learned by answering the questions in Summing up (P16) and Checking Yourself (P54).
3. Learning ability goals
Help students learn how to summarize what they have learned in this unit.
Teaching important and difficult points
How to review and conclude what students learned.
Teaching methods
Let students do the exercises, and then collect their answers. Ask them to conclude the rules and then give them some explanation.
Teaching aids
A projector and a recorder
Teaching procedures & ways
Step1 Revision
Check the homework left before. Ask some students to present the poems that they have written. Teacher can give them some remarks if necessary.
Step2 Ex on Page 49-50
This part is a consolidation of the words and expressions learned in this unit.
1. Let students finish part 1 and part2 ( 5 minutes )
T: Now please open your books and turn to page 49. Let’s use words and expressions. Make adjectives from the nouns and complete the table with the correct nouns, verbs, adjectives or adverbs.
2. Give the students 3 minutes to finish part 3 on next page.
T: Try to complete each sentence using the correct word from the table you have completed within 3 minutes.
3.Check the answers with the whole class.
Suggested answers:
Exercise 1 on P49
1.beauty beautiful 2.joy joyful 3.sorrow sorrowful 4.delight delightful
5. dread dreadful 6. hope hopeful 7. peace peaceful 8. power powerfu
Exercise 2 on P49
Noun Verb Adjective Adverb
anger anger angry angrily
dark darken dark darkly
impression impress impressive impressively
repetition repeat repetitive repetitively
transformation transform transformational
translation translate translated
warmth warm warm warmly
enjoyment enjoy enjoyable enjoyably
expression express expressive expressively
inspiration inspire inspirational inspirationally
Exercise 3 on P50
1. expressively 2. darkness 3. translation 4. repeat
5. inspirational 6. anger 7. impressed 8. enjoyably
9. transformed 10. warm
Step3 Translation on page 51
T: Please turn to page 51 and translate some sentences into English, using the word and phrases in bracket. This part is a consolidation of the grammar item in this unit. You should pay more attention to the sentence structure. Are you clear?
S: Yes.
For the exercise, teacher can ask some of them to go to the blackboard to write down their translations. And then check them with the whole class. If there are some problems, teacher can ask the students to discuss and give them some suggestions to solve them.
Suggested answers:
1. 如果我们的糖没有用完, 我是不会去商店的。（run out of )
If we hadn’t run out of sugar, I wouldn’t have gone to the shops.
2. 如果刘思嘉没有考上大学， 她就不用离别父母搬到千里以外的地方去了。（thousands of)
If Liu Sijia hadn’t gone to university, she wouldn’t have moved to thousands of kilometres away from her parents.
3. 他会为你准备一杯由果汁、酸奶和鸡蛋制成的特殊饮料。（be made up of)
He’ll prepare for you a special drink that is made up of fresh fruit juice, yoghurt and eggs.
4. 如果你当时留心看着她，你就不会在人群中把她弄丢了。（keep an eye on)
If you had kept your eye on her, you wouldn’t have lost her in the crowd.
5. 如果你放松一段时间，你就会康复得更快一些。 （take it easy)
You ‘ll get better more quickly if you take it easy for a while.
6. 如果埃米莉没有逗那只猫，它就不会打翻那个漂亮的花瓶了。（tease; knock over)
If Emily hadn’t teased that cat, it would not have knocked over that beautiful vase.
Step4 Summary
T：Today we have done a lot. We have finished using words and expressions and done some translations. We have also reviewed what we have learned in this unit. Now let’s fill in the chart on Page 16. Think about what you have read and practised in this unit. Then tick the boxes.
SUMMING UP
Think about what you have read and practised in this unit. Then tick the boxes.
I have learned I need to
this well learn more
I have learned about :
some simple types of poetry ;
rhythm and thyme;
some new words and phrased;
how to write some simple poetry;
how to use the subjunctive mood;
how to talk about intentions and plans;
Step5 Project ( on Page 54)
Teacher can ask the students to find their favourite English poem or a translation of their favourite Chinese poem. Get them to read it or write it on a poster and put it on the wall for the rest of the class to share.
Here is a sample for them to refer to :
静夜思
唐-李白
床前明月光，
疑是地上霜。
举头望明月，
低头思故乡。
1) In the Still of the Night（徐忠杰译）
I descry bright moonlig ht in front of my bed.
I suspect it to be hoary frost on the floor.
I watch the bright moon, as I tilt back my head.
I yearn, while stooping, for my homeland more
2) A Tranquil Night (许渊冲译 ）
Abed, I see a silver light,
I wonder if it's frost aground.
Looking up, I find the moon bright;
Bowing, in homesickness I'm drowned.
T: As we know , the lyrics of many songs are good poems . Can you tell me what is your favourite song at the moment?
S: Various answers.
T: Different students have different answers. Now I will introduce my favourite song Seasons in the sun to you. Please listen carefully and try to write out the words. Do you understand?
S: Yes.
After enjoying the song, teacher can show the words for them.
Seasons In The Sun
----by Westlife
Goodbye to you, my trusted friend,
we've known each other since we were nine or ten;
together we've climbed hills and trees,
learned of love and A-B-C`s,
skinned our hearts and skinned our knees.
Goodbye my friend, it's hard to die,
when all the birds are singing in the sky;
now that the spring is in the air,
pretty girls are every where;
think of me and I'll be there.
We had joy, we had fun,
we had seasons in the sun;
but the hills that we climb
were just seasons out of time.
Goodbye, Papa, please pray for me,
I was the black sheep of the family;
you tried to teach me right from wrong,
too much wine and too much song,
wonder how I got along.
Goodbye, Papa, it's hard to die,
when all the birds are singing in the sky;
now that the spring is in the air,
little children every where,
when you'll see them, I'll be there.
We had joy, we had fun,
we had seasons in the sun;
but the wild and the song,
like the season has all gone
Goodbye, Michelle, my little one,
you gave me love and helped me find the sun;
and every time that I was down,
you would always come around
and get my feet back on the ground.
Goodbye, Michelle, it's hard to die,
when all the birds are singing in the sky;
now that the spring is in the air,
with the flowers every where
I wish that we could both be there.
All our lives we had fun,
we had seasons in the sun;
But the stars we could reach
were just starfish on the beach.
再见了,我忠实的朋友
我们从孩提时就已相识,相知, 我们一起爬山,爬树
学会去爱和其他基本知识
我们心意相同,情同手足
再见了朋友,我实在不愿意离去 当所有的鸟儿在天空歌唱. 空气中弥漫着春天的气息. 到处是漂亮的女孩.想我了,我就会与你同在。
我们曾共享快乐。
也曾共享阳光季节。
但我们一起爬山
的那些日子已经逝去。
再见了爸爸,请为我祈祷.
我是家里的害群之马.
你费尽心思教我明辨是非.
我却沉醉于歌酒狂欢中.
真不知道我以前是如何过日子的.
再见了爸爸,我实在不愿意离去.当所有的鸟儿在天空歌唱. 空气中弥漫着春天的气息.小孩子在到处嬉戏. 当你看见他们,我就会与你同在.
我们曾共享快乐,也曾共享阳光季节. 但昔日的歌酒狂欢, 犹如季节更迭已消逝。
再见了蜜雪儿,我的小可爱.
你给了我爱,帮我找到希望.
每当我意志消沉时,
你总会来到我的身边.
鼓励我振作起来
再见了蜜雪儿,我实在不愿意离去.
当所有的鸟儿在天空歌唱,
空气中弥漫着春天的气息
到处都是美丽的花朵
我希望我们都在那儿欢聚！
我们曾共享快乐。
也曾共享阳光季节。
但昔日的歌酒狂欢。
犹如季节更迭已消逝。
也曾共享阳光季节。
我们曾共享快乐。
也曾共享阳光季节。
但昔日的歌酒狂欢。
犹如季节更迭已消逝。
我们曾共享快乐。
也曾共享阳光季节。
但昔日的歌酒狂欢。
犹如季节更迭已消逝。
我们曾共享快乐。
也曾共享阳光季节。
Step6 Check yourself
This is a chance for students to collect knowledge they have learned in the unit. Teacher can leave them some time to finish the questions in the chart. Doing this task can improve students ability of teaching by oneself. If they like they can have a discussion in pairs, teacher can walk among them and give them some help.
Step7 Homework
T: The homework today is to preview the next unit; get familiar with the new words and expressions. OK, class is over. See you later.
S: See you.
教学建议：
本单元的教学围绕诗歌这一主题展开，听说读写等语言知识和语言技能应要围绕“诗歌”这一主题设计。文中涉及诗歌的韵律、节奏，并介绍了几种简单的不同内容和形式的诗歌，要积极引导学生进行讨论，让他们了解诗歌的一些基本特征和写作方法，并学会欣赏这些优美的文学作品。另外将语法基础知识的训练放在诗歌优美的语言环境中进行，在提高学生审美能力的同时，避免了以往语法讲解的枯燥感。
1、 本单元的中心话题是诗歌，由于诗歌包含的内容丰富，所以每节课的设计都应有所侧重，注意掌控课堂教学节奏，不要面面俱到。
2、 由于学生平日较少接触英语诗歌，因此鼓励学生进行课文预习的学习策略，对英语诗歌有个大概的了解，但不主张将所有新单词的意思标注出来，这会削弱阅读训练的作用。
3、 课堂教学的活动设计应有梯度，任务设计要符合学生的实际水平，难易要适中。考虑到诗歌易于朗诵等特点，可增加互动性的教学内容，但应避免流于形式，使课堂既“热闹”又有实效。
4、 在实现教学任务的过程中，老师应加强对学生的引导，比如可进行示范性的诗歌朗诵，引导学生主动参与到互动性的教学活动中来，让学生在轻松的氛围中完成学习任务，体味到诗歌独特的韵味，享受课堂内成功的喜悦。
5、 对学生的课堂表现应于正面鼓励为主，引导学生相互交流和评价，与学生形成互学共进的良好教学环境。
英语选修6教案【篇4】
Unit 2 Poems
Ⅰ.Teacher: Huang Likui
Ⅱ.Teaching material: NSEFC Book 6 -- Unit 2
Ⅲ. Lesson type: reading
Ⅳ. Teaching aids:
1. a tape recorder
2. a projector
3. slides
Ⅴ. Teaching Objectives:
1. To learn some new words and phrases.
2. To master the main idea of each paragraph.
3. To learn some complicated sentence patterns.
Ⅵ. Teaching Important Point:
The usage of some useful words and expressions.
Ⅶ. Teaching Difficult Point:
How to grasp and remember the detailed information of the reading material.
Ⅷ. Teaching Methods:
1. Explanations of words and phrases to get the students know their meanings.
2. More examples to get the students know the usage.
3. Pair work or group work to get every student to join in the class activities and learn self-study.
Ⅸ.Teaching Procedure:
Step 1: greeting and revision (2 minutes)
T: Good morning, girls!
Ss: Good morning, Huang!
T: Yesterday we talked about English poetry, especially some famous English poets, right?
Ss: Yes
T: I think you must have got a first impression of English poetry. This class let’s study the passage in details. In my opinion, this passage is not easy. So some language points may help you to understand it better.
Step 2: Language points (32 minutes)
T: OK, now would you please open your textbook and turn to page 18--English poetry. Have you noticed that in slime paragraphs, there are some words in bold? Please pay attention to these words and make clear “what do the words in bold refer to?”. Ok, let’s read the first paragraph together. Reading poetry, one two start.
Ss: (reading)
T: Thanks for your sweet voice. Who’d like to translate the second sentence into Chinese? Xxx, would you please?
S1: ……
Step 4: Homework (3 minutes)
T: I believe you must have something in your mind. Here comes your homework.
1. Review the language points we have discussed this class and try to retell the whole passage.
2. Finish exercise 2 in word study.
Are you clear?
Ss: Yes
T: So much for today. See you tomorrow!
Ss: See you!
Ⅹ. Blackboard Design:
Language points
1. There are various reasons why people write poetry.
a poem
various: different, its root is vary
poetry is a collective noun, used as an uncountable noun.
2. Some poems tell a story or…
Others try to convey certain emotion
Some …others… ／One… the other(s) …
常常以固定的搭配形式出现
Convey : communicate ideas, feelings to sb
Colors like red convey a sense of energy and strength.
Body language conveys much more information than language spoken.
3. emotion 情绪
emotional 易动感情的
4. learn about sth.
learn sth
5. I saw a person twelve-feet high.
It is appropriate to “tall” here
6. We would have won if Jack had scored that goal.
英语选修6教案【篇5】
Useful Expressions:
2.award sb. sth./award sth. to sb. 把某物授予/给予/判给某人
3.celebrate different film genres 颂扬不同的电影流派
4.six of the major international film festivals 六个主要的国际电影节
5.be appropriate for sb. to do sth 对…而言适合做…
8.view…as…把…视为..
15.feature Hollywood films 以好莱坞电影为特色
18.distinguish between…and…(~ from..) 区别、判别、分清
20. meet one’s standards 达到某人的标准
21.was hatched back in 1978 早在1978年就筹划了
23.change the focus to doing sth. 把重心转移到做某事
25.act/perform in a film 在一部电影中担任演员
26.win an award at a film festival 在一个电影节上获奖
27.give awards/an award to sb. 给某人颁奖,给某人奖励
28.take a step backwards后退 take a step散步、溜达 take steps to do采取措施
29. from all around the globe 来自全球、来自全世界
30.make films with large budgets 以很大的预算资金投入制作电影
32. have a chance of doing sth./to do sth.有可能做某事
33.lose our international angle 失去我们的国际视野
34.don’t favour films from any one country 不偏爱来自任何一国的电影
37.have a good reputation worldwide 在世界范围内有良好的声誉
38.put forward a personal opinion 提出一个个人意见
44.interfere in someone else’s activity 打断某人，干涉某人的行动
47.be awarded for doing sth. 因为做某事而获奖
48.keep sth. in the shadows 保持某事在幕后/在阴影中/在后台运作
49.have no difficulty in doing sth. 做某时毫无困难
52.express oneself in English 用英语表达自己
57. have an appointment to meet sb.约见某人
60. think twice about sth. / doing sth. 三思而行，慎重考虑后再作决定
61. waste time/money on sth.浪费时间/钱在某事上
63.give sb. one’s sincere congratulations 给某人最衷心的祝愿
68.enter a speech competition 参加一个演讲比赛
71.have no commercial future 没有商业前途
83.have contradictory feelings about 对……有矛盾的情感
86. be dedicated to专心致志于…
88. have a tendency to do sth. 有做某事的趋势
Useful Expressions:
1.Joining us in the studio are Isabel from the Cannes Film Festival, …
来到我们节目现场的有来自戛纳电影节的伊莎贝尔罗斯……
Gone are the days when we used foreign oil.
我们使用洋油的日子一去不复返了。
Present at the meeting are some famous artists.
与会的是一些著名的画家。
2.Maria, do tell us a little about the Venice Film Festival.
玛丽娅，一定要告诉我们一些关于威尼斯电影节的情况。
3.I hate to interrupt you, but in defence of the Venice Film Festival, I have to point out that… 我很抱歉打断你，但我得为威尼斯电影节说句话，我必须指出……
4. It was then that Robert Redford took over …
就是那时候罗伯特雷特福德接管……
5. …there is a good chance it will become famous.
它获奖就有了很大的机会。
6.People tend to present their personal opinion as if it were a collective group’s opinion.
人们总是陈述自己个人的观点仿佛它是一个集体的观点。
7.While there is no restriction on foreign entries, those that win are in the minority.
虽然没有限制外国电影的进入，但外国电影获奖的只是少数。
8.Whether you think the Academy Awards are a film festival or not, everyone agrees that the Oscar is the best-known award a contemporary film can receive.
无论学院奖是否是一个电影节,每个人都同意奥斯卡奖是当代电影所能获得的最高奖项。
9.It felt like the camera was in the sky.
感觉起来就好象照相机在空中。
10.I think this is more to highlight the advanced special effects than to help the film’s plot.
在我看来，这是为了更加突出电影高超的特效，而不是有助于表现电影的情节。
11.As long as the film’s quality meets our standards, we include it.
只要电影的质量达到标准，都能参加评选。
12．Considering the history of our festival, we feel it is important to favour films from any one country.
考虑到我们电影节的历史，我们觉得不偏向任何国家的电影是非常重要的。
13．It was the festival that he took over in 1981.
他在1981年接管的就是这个电影节。
14．It was not until nine that I got up.
就是直到九点我才起床。
15.Who was it that told him what had happened?
到底是谁告诉他所发生的事？
英语选修6教案【篇6】
教学准备
教学目标
一、 语言知识目标
初步理解、掌握课文中关于克隆的词汇，学习分析课文中的长难句子。
二、 阅读技能目标
1. 能获取和处理文章中的主要信息。
2. 能够掌握文中出现的重要的语言知识
三、 学习策略目标
掌握速读、略读、猜测词义等阅读策略。
四、 情感态度目标
让学生认识到克隆的利和弊。
五、 文化意识目标
了解克隆，正确地利用克隆技术来为人类服务。
教学重难点
初步理解、掌握课文中关于克隆的词汇，学习分析课文中的长难句子。
教学过程
Step 1 Daily report
One student comes to the front and gives a report about advantages and disadvantages of science and technology.
Step 2 leading-in
The teacher shows some pictures and starts a discussion about cloning.
Step 3 Skimming
Task 1: What’s the main idea of the passage?
Task 2: Match the main idea with each paragraph
Para 1: A. People’s attitude towards cloning.
Para 2: B. The problems of Dolly.
Para 3: C. The impact of Dolly.
Para 4: D. Two major uses and the procedure of cloning.
Para 5: E. The definition(定义)of cloning.
Step 4 Scanning
Task 1. Look through Para 2 and answer the following questions.
(1) What are the two major uses of cloning?
(2) Which one is easier, to make plant clones or animal clones?
Task 2. Look through Para 3 and fill in the chart.
Task 3. Do the following translation and word guessing.
(1). Translation:
On the other hand, Dolly’s appearance raised a storm of objections and had a great impact on the media and public imagination.
(2). The word “controversial” in paragraph 4 probably means_________.
A. complicated B. arguable
C. important D. valuable
Task4. Do the following Tor F questions based on Paragraph 5.
1. People feared some evil leaders might use cloning to reach their goal.
2. All the research into cloning will be forbidden.
3. Religious leaders are in favor of human cloning.
Step 5 Enjoy beautiful sentences
1. Cloning plants is straightforward while cloning animals is very complicated.
2. At last the determination and patience of the scientists paid off.
3. The fact that she seemed to develop normally was very encouraging.
Step 6 Question and answer
This part is for students to find if they still have questions. If there is any, they can ask their classmates to help them.
Step 7 Quiz
Note: This part is very challenging. In the picture there are five numbers. Students can choose their lucky number and answer questions. Most of the questions are based on what they have learned in class.
Step 8. Test yourself
Fill in the blank with proper words.
Cloning is a way of _______ (make) an e-act copy of another animal or plant. It has two major uses. One is _______ gardeners use it to produce plants. The ______ is that it is valuable for medical research on animals. ________, the process of cloning is difficult ___________ (undertake).
The first successful clone, Dolly the sheep, made the whole _________ (science) world follow its progress, though it had ________ problems than the normal sheep. On the other hand, Dolly’s appearance _______ (raise) a storm of objections and had a great impact ______ the media and public imagination. Different people have different opinions on it. However, scientists still wonder ______ cloning will help or harm us and where it is leading us.
Step 9 Debate
Topic: Are you for or against cloning?
课后小结
Homework
Write a passage entitled My view on cloning.
课后习题
评测练习主要有两个。
一是quiz 环节：
主要有5个问题：
1. Listen to a part of an English song and try to learn from it.
2. Please use “pay off” to make a sentence.
3.Give us some detailed information about Dolly.
4. Translate the following sentence into English.
另一方面，多利羊的出现引起了一阵强烈的反对，对媒体和公众的想象力也产生了极大的影响。
5. What is your attitude towards cloning? Give your reason.
二是test yourself 环节：
Fill in the blank with proper words.
Cloning is a way of _______ (make) an e-act copy of another animal or plant. It has two major uses. One is _______ gardeners use it to produce plants. The ______ is that it is valuable for medical research on animals. ________, the process of cloning is difficult ___________ (undertake).
The first successful clone, Dolly the sheep, made the whole _________ (science) world follow its progress, though it had ________ problems than the normal sheep. On the other hand, Dolly’s appearance _______ (raise) a storm of objections and had a great impact ______ the media and public imagination. Different people have different opinions on it. However, scientists still wonder ______ cloning will help or harm us and where it is leading us.
从同学们的答题效果来看，学生们回答问题的积极性很高，准确率在98%以上。
教案【二】
核心单词
1. differ
v. 不同;相异;使?-?-相异
常用结构：
A differs from B in ...A与B在?-?-方面不同
A differs with B about/on/over... A与B就?-?-意见相左
Their house differs from mine in having no garage.
他们的房子与我的不同，区别在于他们的没有车库。
The two sides still differ with each other over the question of pay.双方在报酬的问题上仍各持己见。
联想拓展
difference n. 不同之处
different adj. 不同的
make a difference to 对?-?-产生变化;对什么有
影响
different from 与?-?-不同，不同于高手过
招
高手过招
用适当的介词填空 (原创)
①The two squares differ colour but not size.
②The husband differs the wife who is to take charge of the money.
③It doesnt make a difference me whether you are going to stay.
④This is a different car the one I drove yesterday.
答案：1. ①in; in ②with; on/about/over
③to ④from
2. undertake
vt.(undertook;undertaken)着手;从事;承担;保证，答应
常用结构：
undertake sth. 着手/从事/承担某事
undertake to do sth. 保证/答应做某事
undertake that ...保证?-?-
The scientist undertakes the e-periment.
这位科学家从事这项实验。
I can undertake the responsibility for the changes.
我愿意承担这些变革的责任。
The lawyer undertook a new case.
那个律师接了一个新的案子。
He undertook to finish the job by Friday.
他答应星期五之前完成这项工作。
高手过招
翻译句子 (原创)
①他下个月要去西部旅行。
He will undertake a journey to the west ne-t month.
②我不能保证按时做完它。
I cant undertake that Ill finish it on time.
3. objection
N. 不赞成;反对;异议
常用结构：
Have an objection to ... 反对?-?-
raise/voice an objection 提出异议
联想拓展
Object v. 反对，不赞成
N. 物体;目标
Object to sb./sth. 不赞成某人/某事
Object to doing sth. 反对做某事
Object that ... 反对?-?-
No one objected to the plan.没有人反对这项计划。
We object to being treated like this.
我们反对受到这样的待遇。
Why do some people object to human cloning?
为什么一些人反对克隆人类呢?
mother objected that Jimmy was too weak to take up the job.
母亲反对说，吉米身体太虚弱，不能承担那份工作。
The building is the main object of his interest.
他最感兴趣的是这栋建筑物。
高手过招
单项填空
We to punishing a whole group for one persons fault. (2010?¤01?¤江西南昌检测)
Complain B. object C. oppose D. resist
解析：选B。句意为：我们反对因为一个人的错误而惩罚整体。object to doing sth.反对做某事。
4. obtain
vt. 获得;赢得
易混辨析
Obtain/acquire/gain/earn/achieve
Obtain意为“获得，买到”。指通过努力或请求而得到，含有满足要求或得达到目的的意味，用于正式语体中。
Acquire意为“经过努力逐步获得才能、知识、习惯等，也可用于表示对财物等的获得”，强调“一经获得就会长期持有”的含义。
gain意为“通过较大努力获得某种利益或好处;亦可指军事上的武力夺取等”。
earn意为“挣得，赢得”，指因工作等而得到报酬或待遇。
Achieve意为“得到;获得”，多指成就、目标、幸福的取得。
He failed to obtain a scholarship.
他没有获得奖学金。
I finally managed to obtain a copy of the report.
我终于设法弄到了这个报告的副本。
We should try to acquire good habits.
我们应该努力养成好习惯。
He found it easy to earn e-tra money.
他发现赚点额外收入很容易。
But we can only achieve it together.
然而，只有共同奋斗才能实现它。
高手过招
翻译句子 (原创)
①The journalist immediately set out to obtain these important facts.
那位新闻记者立即着手获取这些重要的事实。
②Knowledge can be obtained through study.
知识可通过学习获得。
5. forbid
vt. (forbade/forbad; forbidden) 禁止;不准;阻止;妨碍
常用结构：
Forbid sth./doing sth. 禁止，不许(做某事)
Forbid sb. to do sth. 禁止某人做某事
The law forbids the use of chemical fertilizers.
法律禁止使用化学肥料。
I forbid you to tell anyone.
我不准你告诉任何人。
高手过招
翻译句子 (原创)
①飞机上禁止吸烟。
Smoking is forbidden on the plane.
②他爸爸不准他和她交谈。
His father forbade him to talk to her.
③要禁止小孩不玩电脑游戏很难。
It is hard to forbid children to play computer games.
6. owe
vt. 欠(账、钱、人情等);应该把?-?-归功于?-?-;感激，感恩
常用结构：
Owe sb. sth. = owe sth. to sb. 欠(某人)债
Owe sth. to sb./sth.将某事物归因或归功于某人/事
He owes his father ￡50. = He owes ￡50 to his father.
他欠他父亲50英镑。
We owe this discovery to Newton.
我们把这一发现归功于牛顿。
高手过招
用适当的介词填空 (原创)
①How much do I owe you the groceries?
②He owes his success more luck than ability.
③I owe a lot my wife and children.
答案：①for②to; to③ to
7. resist
vt.抵抗;对抗
常用结构：
resist sth. 抵制;阻挡某事
resist doing sth. 反对做某事
Cant resist doing sth. 忍不住做某事
The nation was unable to resist the invasion.
该国无力抵抗侵略。
A healthy body resists disease.
健康的身体能抵御疾病。
I could hardly resist laughing.
我忍不住笑了。
resistance n. 抵抗，反抗;抵抗力
resistant adj. 抵抗的;有抵抗力的
Be resistant to sb./sth.对某人/某事有抵抗力
resister n. 抵制者;抗拒者;电阻器
高手过招
翻译句子 (原创)
①He resisted being carried off.
他阻挡别人把他带走。
②She can not resist the temptation of chocolate.
她无法抗拒巧克力的诱惑 。
重点短语
8. pay off
得到好结果，取得成功(常用主动语态);偿清债款;付清工资解雇;(对?-?-进行)报复;收买(某人)
At last, his hard work paid off.
最后，他的努力得到了回报。
did your plan pay off? 你的计划成功了吗?
联想拓展
Pay for付?-?-的钱;为?-?-而付出代价
Pay back sth./pay sb. back sth. 偿还某物/偿还某人某物
Pay sb. ...for sth. 因某事而付给某人?-?-
Pay sb. ...to do sth. 付给某人?-?-去做某事
Pay sb. back for sth. 向?-?-报复
高手过招
(1)单项填空
If you go for a long ride in a friends car, its the custom to offer to some of the e-penses. (2010?¤01?¤江苏启东检测)
A. pay B. pay off C. pay for D. pay back
(2)用pay的相关短语填空(原创)
①After ten years of hard working she finally
Her debt.
②Our efforts are sure to .
③Have you the milkman this week?
④Have you the money the bank yet?
⑤I will you ne-t week.
答案：(1)解析：选C。根据句意可知，这里表示?°为?-?-偿付一部分费用?±，故选C。pay for 为?-?-而付钱;为?-?-付出代价。
(2)① paid off②pay off③paid④paid; to⑤pay; back
9. in favour of
赞成;支持;有利于;主张
I am in favour of stopping work now. 我赞成现在停止工作。
In sb.s favour 对某人有利
do sb. a favour /do a favour for sb. 帮某人忙
do sb. the favour to do sth./do sb. a favour by doing sth.帮助某人做某事
Favour vt. 赞同;支持
The child favours his father with his brown eyes.
这个孩子棕色的眼睛像他的父亲。
温馨提示
表示?°支持，赞同某人/某事?±除了用in favour of之外;还可以用：be for sb./sth.; stand on ones side等。
Be against sb./sth.表示?°不支持，不赞同某人/某事?±。
高手过招
(1)单项填空
I dont like to ask people for help as a rule but I wonder if you could me a favour. (2010?¤01?¤江苏启东检测)
A. make B. do C. find D. get
(2)用方框内所给短语的适当形式填空 (原创)
In case of/in consequence of/in favour of/in possession of
①All his family are his decision to work in western area after graduation.
②While reading, coming across new words, you?ˉd better guess their meanings rather than refer to the dictionary.
③Mary told me that she was some lovely jewels.
④They had to move to another city the typhoon.
答案：(1)解析：选B。句意为：通常我不喜欢向别人寻求帮助，但我希望你能帮我的忙。do sb. a favour 帮某人忙。
(2)①in favour of ②in case of
10. (be) bound to do ...
一定或注定(做)?-?-
The weather is bound to get better tomorrow.
明天天气一定会变好的。
Youve done so much work that youre bound to pass the e-am.你下了这么大功夫, 一定能通过考试。
联想拓展
Bound v. 跳跃;限制;形成?-?-的界限
N. 跳跃;界限;范围
Adj.必然的,一定的
Be bound to sth. 受?-?-限制;被?-?-所束缚
Be bound for 准备到?-?-去;开往;去?-?-地方
Be bound up with 与?-?-有密切关系
高手过招
用括号内所给词语的适当形式填空 (原创)
①These problems were almost bound (arise).
②When you are dealing with so many patients, mistakes (bound) happen.
答案： ① to arise ②are bound to
11. be in good/poor condition
状况很好(坏);情况很好(坏)
联想拓展
Out of condition 状况欠佳
Working/living/studying conditions工作/生活/学习环境
On condition (that)... 在?-?-条件下;
倘若?-?-
On no condition 一点也不; 决不
In e-cellent condition 处于极佳的状况
The ship is not in a condition/is in no condition to make a long voyage. 此船的现状不适宜远航。
The car is still in e-cellent condition. 这辆汽车状况极佳。
高手过招
用适当的介词填空 (原创)
①The car has been well maintained and is e-cellent condition.
②He?ˉs e-cellent condition a man of his age.
③I had no e-ercise for ages; Im really of condition.
④You can go out condition that you wear an overcoat.
答案：① in ②in; for ③out ④on
重点句型
12. Then came the disturbing news that Dolly had become seriously ill.
接着传来了多莉病重的坏消息。
当时间副词now, then位于句首，谓语是come, appear等表示?°出现?±一类的动词时，主句用全倒装语序。
Now comes your turn. 现在轮到你了。
高手过招
单项填空
In the dark forests , some large enough to hold several English towns. (2010?¤01?¤河南镇平检测)
A. stand many lakes B. lie many lakes
C. many lakes lie D. many lakes stand
解析：选B。考查词语辨析及倒装语序。当地点状语位于句首时，主句用全部倒装，表示某物存在于某处，应用动词lie。
教案【三】
词汇
部分 词语
辨析 1. adapt / adopt 2. ignore / neglect / overlook
3. luck / fortune / destiny / fate
词形
变化 1. comfort n. 舒适;安慰 vt.使舒适;安慰，慰问 comfortable adj.舒服的uncomfortable adj.不舒服的，不自在的 comfortably adv.舒适地uncomfortably adv.不舒服地;难受地
2. classify vt. 把……分类，
把……分级 classification n.分类，分级;类别，级别
3. betray vt. 出卖;背叛 betrayal n.[u]出卖，辜负，暴露 betrayer n. 出卖者
4. superior adj.上级的，较
高的 n.上级，长官 superiority n.优越(性) ，优等
5. trouble n. 麻烦，困难
vt.麻烦 vi.费力 troublesome adj. 令人烦恼的，麻烦的
6. pronounce vt.发音;宣布 pronunciation n.发音
重点
单词 1. adaptation n.[c] 改编
2. hesitate vi. 犹豫，踌躇，不愿
3. mistaken adj. 犯错的，错误的
4. condemn vt. 判刑，谴责，宣告……不适用
5. acquaintance n.[u]相识;熟悉 n.[c]熟人
6. fortune n.[u]命运;运气;机会 [c]财产，财富
重点
词组 1. pass sb. off as... 把某人改变或冒充成……
2. a handful of 一把;一小撮，少数，少量
3. in amazement 惊讶地
4. in terms of... 以……的观点;就……而说
5. show... in 带或领……进来
重点句型 1. Generally speaking, people are more polite to those whom they think are of higher social class.
2. Henry Higgins and Colonel Pickering are sitting deep in conversation.
重点语法 分词作状语(见语法部分)
语言要点(模块)
Ⅰ.词语辨析 (旨在提供完形填空所需材料)
1. adapt / adopt
【解释】
Adapt v. 使…适应，改编This novel has been adapted for radio from the Russian original. 这部小说已由俄文原著改编成无线电广播节目。
Adopt v. 采用，收养，接受Having no children of their own they decided to adopt an orphan.
他们因没有亲生儿女，所以决定领养一个孤儿。
【练习】用adapt与adopt的正确形式填空。
1). You must ________ to the norms of the society you live in.
2). Paul’ s mother had him _________ because she couldn’ t look after him herself.
3). This machine has been specially _________ for underwater use.
4). These styles can be _________ to suit individual tastes.
5). We should _________ the consumers’ suggestion.
Keys: 1). adapt 2). adopted 3). adapted 4). adapted 5). adopt
2. ignore / neglect / overlook
【解释】
Ignore v. 忽视，不理睬，指有意识地拒绝 [+sb/sth];
Neglect v. 忽视，忽略，疏忽，指无意识地忽视或忘记 [+sb/sth][+to do];
Overlook v. 忽略，疏漏，指有意识地或无意识地忽略、遗漏或不采取行动。
【练习】选择neglect，overlook，ignored填空。
1). She saw him coming but she _______ him.
2). He _______ to make repairs in his house.
3). The mother _______ her little boy’ s bad behavior.
Keys: 1). ignored 2). neglected 3). overlooked
3. luck / fortune / destiny / fate
【解释】
luck意为“命运，运气”。
Fortune意为“命运”，多含变幻无常的意味。
destiny强调命中注定，是天意。
Fate多比喻不幸或死亡，含宿命的意味。
【练习】选择luck，fortune，destiny，fate填空。
1). She told my _______ by reading my palm.
2). I hope this charm will bring you _______.
3). A meeting to decide the _______ of the factory is to be held today.
4). _______ drew us together.
Keys: 1). fortune 2). luck 3). fate 4). Destiny
Ⅱ.词性变化(旨在提供语法填空所需材料)
1. comfort n. 舒适;安慰 vt.使舒适;安慰，慰问 comfortable adj.舒服的uncomfortable adj.不舒服的，不自在的 comfortably adv.舒适地uncomfortably adv.不舒服地;难受地
2. classify vt. 把……分类，
把……分级 classification n.分类，分级;类别，级别
3. betray vt. 出卖;背叛 betrayal n.[u]出卖，辜负，暴露 betrayer n. 出卖者
4. superior adj.上级的，较
高的 n.上级，长官 superiority n.优越(性) ，优等
5. trouble n. 麻烦，困难
vt.麻烦 vi.费力 troublesome adj. 令人烦恼的，麻烦的
6. pronounce vt.发音;宣布 pronunciation n.发音
【练习】用括号内所提供词的适当形式填空。
1). The hotel is modern and ________ (comfort) furnished.
2). She always felt slightly ________ (comfort) in a hat.
3). We will never forgive his ________ (betray).
4). She works well with those superior ________ (介词) her in the firm.
5). The economy has become a ________ (trouble) issue for the Conservative Party.
6). We had no trouble ________ (find) the address.
7). The books in the library ________ (classify) according to subject.
8). Only eleven of these accidents were classified ________ (介词) major.
9). She doesn’ t like having her ________ (pronounce) corrected.
Keys: 1). comfortably 2). uncomfortable 3). betrayal 4). to
5). troublesome 6). finding 7). are classified 8). as 9). pronunciation
Ⅲ.重点词汇(旨在提供词汇综合运用所需材料)
1. adaptation n.[c] 改编 adapt vt.使适应(合);修改,改编 vi. (to)适应
[典例]
1). The play is an adaptation of a short novel. 这部戏剧是一部短篇小说的改编本。
2). The adaptation of animals to the environment is rather slow. 动物对环境的适应是相当慢的。
[重点用法]
Adaptation to 对……的适应 adapt oneself to 使适应;使适合
[练习] 根据句子的要求在括号里填入适当的词或翻译。
1). He tried hard to _______ himself _______ (使自己适应) the new conditions.
2). He made a quick ________ _________ (适应了) the new environment.
3). When they moved to Canada, the children _______ _______ the change very well.
Keys: 1). adapt; to 2). adaptation to 3). adapted to
2. hesitate vi. 犹豫，踌躇，不愿 hesitation n.[u,c]踌躇;犹豫不决
[典例]
1). He hesitated before he answered because he didn’ t know what to say. 他在回答之前犹豫了一下，因为他不知道说什么。
2). Don’ t hesitate about that. Do it at once. 对于那件事不要再犹豫了。马上去做吧。
[重点用法]
Hesitate to do sth. 做某事犹豫不决 hesitate about (doing)sth. 对某事犹豫不决
[练习] 根据句子的要求在括号里填入适当的词。
1). He was still ________ over whether to join the e-pedition.
2). He did not hesitate _______ (ask) her to sit beside him.
3). Without any_______ (hesitate), he jumped into the river to save the drowning child.
4). There’ s no room for _______ (hesitate).
Keys: 1). hesitating 2). to ask 3). hesitation 4). hesitation
3. mistaken adj. 犯错的，错误的 mistake n.&v. 错误，过失;弄错，误解，把……误认为
[典例]
1). You are mistaken about him.你误会他了。
2). It can’ t have been my car. You must be mistaken. 那不可能是你的车。你肯定错了。
[重点用法]
By mistake 错误地 mistake for 被误认为是
mistake in 在……的错误 make a mistake 犯错误
[练习] 根据句子的要求在括号里填入适当的词。
1). Someone must have left the door open _______ mistake.
2). We may have made a mistake ________ our calculations.
3). Tom didn’ t make a single spelling ________ in his composition.
4). You _______ my meaning entirely.
5). He was ________ for the minister.
6). Ivan’ s work is always full of _______.
Keys: 1). by 2). in 3). mistake 4). mistook 5). mistaken 6). mistakes
4. condemn vt. 判刑，谴责，宣告……不适用 condemnation n.[u,c]谴责，指责，定罪
[典例]
1). We condemn his foolish behavior. 我们谴责他的愚蠢行为。
2). The criminal was condemned to death. 那个罪犯被判处死刑。
[重点用法]
Condemn sb. / sth. 谴责某人/某事 be condemned to判以……刑;使……注定
[练习] 根据句子的要求在括号里填入适当的词。
1). She knew that society would ________ her for leaving her children.
2). There was widespread international _________ (condemn) of the bombing.
3). He was found guilty and condemned ________ death.
Keys: 1). condemn 2). condemnation 3). to
5. acquaintance n.[u]相识;熟悉;熟知 n.[c]相识的人，熟人 acquaint vt. 使熟知，告知
[典例]
1). I have some acquaintance with the Russian. 我懂一点儿俄语。
2). She was a casual acquaintance in Vienna. 她是我在越南的一个熟人。
[重点用法]
make one’ s acquaintance = make the acquaintance with sb. 结识某人 acquaint sb. wth.... 使某人认识/了解……
[练习] 根据句子的意思在横线上填入适当的词。
1). The musician had little acquaintance ________ modern science.
2). I am delighted to ________ your acquaintance.
3). She has many ________ in the business community.
4). I have some acquaintance ________ Spanish.
5). I need to ________ myself with the new regulations.
Keys: 1). with 2). make 3). acquaintances 4). with 5). acquaint
6. fortune n.[u]命运;运气;机会 [c]财产，财富 fortunate adj.幸运的，幸福的
[典例]
1). She had the good fortune to be free from illness. 她运气好，没得病。
2). It is believed that it will bring good fortune in the coming year. 据说它还能为人们在新的一年里带来好运气。
[重点用法]
make a fortune发财 seek one’ s fortune外出找出路
Try one’ s fortune碰运气 be fortunate to do sth./in doing sth. 幸运做某事
[练习] 根据句子的要求翻译。
1). He _______ _______ _______ (发了财) by selling houses.
2). She _______ _______ _______ (寻求她的财富) in another country.
3). _________ (不幸的是), the fire spread quidkly after it had started.
Keys: 1). made a fortune 2). sought her fortune 3). Unfortunately
Ⅳ.重点词组(旨在提供综合运用所需材料)
1. pass sb. off as... 把某人改变或冒充成……
[典例]
1). He escaped by passing himself off as a guard. 他冒充警卫逃走了。
2). She passed him off as her husband. 她把他假充作自己的丈夫。
[重点用法]
Pass sth. to sb. 将某物递给某人 pass away 去世 pass down/on... 把……传给后世
Pass...on to 把……传递给…… pass by 走过;经过 pass through 通过;穿过
[练习] 根据句子的要求在括号里填入适当的介词或副词。
1). Pass the book _______ _______ me when you’ ve finished it.
2). I was sorry to learn that his mother had passed _______.
3). She passed _______ a difficult period after her marriage failed.
4). They bought up pieces of old furniture and passed them _______ _______ valuable antiques.
Keys: 1). on; to 2). away 3). through 4). off; as
2. a handful of 一把;一小撮，少数，少量
[典例]
He pulled out a handful of coins from his pocket. 他从口袋里取出一把钱。
[短语归纳]
A mouthful of一口;少量 an armful of 一揽;一抱
[练习] 根据句子的意思翻译。
1). We have received only _______ _______ _______ (少数几封) letters on this subject.
2). He only ate a few _______ _______ (几口) meat.
Keys: 1). a handful of 2). mouthfuls of
3. in amazement 惊讶地
[典例]
I stared at him in amazement. 我吃惊地盯着他。
[短语归纳] in在结构中表示“处于……状态”的短语：
In action在行动 in advance 事先 in anger 气忿地 in common共有，共同
In danger处于危险中 in debt欠债 in detail详细地 in doubt怀疑
In e-citement兴奋地 in tears流着眼泪 in general 大体上 in operation 生效,运转着
In place 在适当的位置 in reality实际上 in return 作为报答 in secret秘密地
In shape 处于良好状态 in short 简言之 in sight被看见 in silence沉默地
In vain 白白地 in thought 思考 in trouble有麻烦 in turn依次为
[练习] 根据句子的要求在括号里填入适当的词。
1). ________ my amazement, he changed so much.
2). I find it ________ (amaze) that you can’ t swim.
3). I heard that a burglar broke into my room last night ________ amazement. I couldn’ t believe my ears.
Keys: 1). To 2). amazing 3). in
4. in terms of... 以……的观点;就……而说
[典例]
1). In terms of money, he’ s quite rich, but not in terms of happiness. 就钱来说他很富有，但就幸福来说就不然了。
2). It is difficult to e-press it in terms of science. 要用科学的字眼来表达它是很困难的。
[短语归纳] 英语中类似结构的短语有：
In need of 需要 in charge of 负责 in search of 搜寻
In hope of 希望 in honor of 纪念、尊重 in favor of 有利于
In spite of 尽管 in case of 以防、万一 in place of 代替
[练习] 根据句子的意思完成句子。
1). Think of it ________ ________ ________ (从……角度) an investment.
2). It was a bad year for films, ________ _________ ________ ________ _________ ________ _________ (无论从数量上还是质量上).
3). This project is ________ _________ ________ ________ (迫切地需要) funding.
4). He is homeless and________ _________ ________ ________ _________ (需要帮助).
Keys: 1). in terms of 2). in terms of both quantity and quality
3). in great/urgent need of 4). in great need of help
5. show... in 带或领……进来
[典例]
1). Tom showed a little boy in. 汤姆带了一个小男孩进来。
2). Will you show him in? 你把他领进来好吗?
[短语归纳] show短语：
Show sb. out 领某人出去 show sb. around 领某人参观某地
Show off 炫耀，卖弄，使显眼 show up 出现，来到某处，揭露，显得好看
[练习] 用适当的介词或副词填空。
1). 1 will show you ________ when you are in the city.
2). She likes to show ________ her nice figure by wearing tight dresses.
3). Uncle George didn’ t show ________ for our wedding because he forgot it.
4). He showed me ________ a sittingroom.
Keys: 1). around 2). off 3). up 4). into
Ⅴ.重点句子(旨在提供句子结构等所需材料)
1. Generally speaking, people are more polite to those whom they think are of higher social class. 总的来说，人们对那些他们认为属于较高社会阶层的人更礼貌一些。
[解释]
1). 本句中的of 表示“从属”关系。例如：
Birds of a feather flock together. 物以类聚，人以群分。
2). be of+形容词+抽象名词=be+副词+与该抽象名词同根的形容词。例如：
What I said is of great importance. = What I said is very important. 我所说的非常重要。
可用于以上结构的抽象名词及相对应的形容词有：ability-able, help-helpful, use-useful,
Importance-important, interest-interesting, significance-significant, value-valuable
[练习] 翻译句子。
1). 他是个兴趣广泛的人。
____________________________________________________________________________________
2). 我觉得这本英汉字典非常有用。
____________________________________________________________________________________
Keys: 1). He is a person of wide interests.
2). I find the English-Chinese dictionary very useful / of great use.
2. Henry Higgins and Colonel Pickering are sitting deep in conversation. 亨利.希金斯正与皮克林上校促膝长谈。
[解释] 形容词短语deep in sth.“专心;全神贯注;深陷”，可用在句中作表语、状语。例：
1). He was deep in thought. 他陷入了沉思。
2). He was so deep in his work that he was not aware of the fire. 他是如此专心工作以致于不知道发生了火灾。
3). Deep in work, he didn’ t notice a man come in.
同样用法的词还有：lost, determined, absorbed, dressed等，例：
1). Lost in thought, he almost ran into the car in front of him.
2). Absorbed in novel, he forgot his appointment.
[练习] 翻译句子。
1). _________ (determine) not to come back, she went out of the house.
2). _________ (dress) as a princess, she went onto the stage.
Keys: 1). Determined 2). Dressed
课文要点(模块)
Ⅰ.课文词汇等填空(旨在复习本课文中的单词拼写和主要词语等)
根据课文内容完成下面语法填空，注意单词拼写和词语用法：
Higgins, Pickering and Eliza were ____1______ from the rain. Eliza was a poor flower girl who was _____2_____ to improve herself. But she could speak poor English. The e-pert in phonetic, Higgins, noticed this and became ____3_____ in teaching her English. At first he wrote down the words that the girl used. She was surprised at this. Later she knew that phonetics _____4_____ from people’s own ____5_____. And that was Higgins ____6____ and hobby. Higgins said her ___7_______ English will condemn her to the gutter to the end of her days. Once _____8____ to speak properly, the girl could ____9_____ herself off in three months as a duchess at an ambassador’s garden party. Higgins and Pickering had e-changed their own opinion and decided to teach her English from the _____10_____.
(答案: 1.sheltering; 2.ambitious; 3.interested; 4.classified; 5.speech;
fession; 7.terrible; 8.educated; 9.pass; 10. alphabet)
Ⅱ.课文大意概括 (旨在训练用30个单词概括大意的能力)
阅读课文，试着用30来个单词概括课文大意或翻译下面短文。
这个剧本讲述的是一个来自社会下层且语言粗俗的卖花女，偶然遇到上层社会的皮克林上校和希金斯教授的情景。
The play is about ____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
答案：The play is about a Pygmalion from the lower society with vulgar language, who occasionally encountered Colonel Pickering and Professor Higgins in the upper society.
Ⅲ.课文佳句背诵与仿写 (旨在培养对难句的理解和写作能力)
1.【原句】A man is hiding from the rain listening to people’s language and watching their reactions. 有一个男士在躲雨，边听人们谈话，边观察着人们的反应。
[模仿要点] 句子结构：主句 + V-ing and V-ing
【模仿1】 所以的学生在晚会上又唱又跳，玩得很开心。
_______________________________________________________________________________
答案： All the students enjoyed the party, singing and dancing.
【模仿2】我喜欢独自学习，可以集中精神于我做的事情及思考我的想法。
_______________________________________________________________________________
答案：I prefer studying alone, concentrate on what I am doing and thinking my own thoughts
2.【原句】Disappointed at the outcome, but thinking it is better than nothing, Eliza said: “ Thank you, sir.” 对先生付的钱表现出失望的样子，但想到有总比没有好,Eliza 说：“谢谢,先生.”
[模仿要点] 句子结构：V-ed 状语，+ but +V-ing状语, +主句
【模仿1】虽然训练很累，但相信总有一天他会成为冠军，刘翔告诉自己要坚持。
_______________________________________________________________________________
答案：Tired from the training, but believing one day he would be a championship, Liu -iang told himself he must carry on.
【模仿2】虽然被电脑游戏吸引，但想到他的作业还没做，他立即关掉电脑。
_______________________________________________________________________________
答案：Attracted by the computer games, but thinking that his home was still undone, he turned off the computer at once.
3. 【原句】She’s quite a common girl with dirty nails. 她是很普通的一个年轻姑娘，手指甲脏兮兮的。
[模仿要点] 句子结构： a/an + adj. + C.N. + with短语作定语
【模仿1】她是一位相当聪明的学生，且乐于助人。
_______________________________________________________________________________
答案：She is quite an intelligent student with a helping hand.
【模仿2】他是一位有着快乐家庭的成功商人。
_______________________________________________________________________________
答案：He is a successful business man with a happy family.
单元自测 (模块)
1完形填空
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从21—30各题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出选项，并在答题卡上将该项涂黑。
字数：203 完成时间：14分钟 难度：---
most greenhouses look like a small glass house. Green-houses are used to grow plants, especially in the winter. Greenhouses 21 by trapping heat from the sun. The glass panes (窗玻璃) of the greenhouse let in light but keep heat from 22 . This causes the greenhouse to heat up – much like the 23 of a car parked in sunlight -- which keeps the plants 24 enough to live in winter.
The Earth' s atmosphere is all around us. It is the air that we breathe. Greenhouse gases in the atmosphere 25 much like the glass panes in a greenhouse. 26 enters the Earth's atmosphere, passing through the blanket of green- house gases. As it reaches the Earth's surface, the land, water and biosphere (生物圈) 27 its energy. Once absorbed, this energy is passed back into the 28 . Some of the energy passes back into space, but much of it 29 , trapped in the atmosphere by the greenhouse gases, causing our world to heat up.
The greenhouse 30 is important. Without it, the Earth would not be warm enough for humans to live. If the effect becomes stronger, though, it could make the Earth warmer than usual. Even a little e-tra warming may cause problems for humans, plants and animals.
21. A. run B. work C. perform D. apply
22. A. increasing B. cooling C. escaping D. passing
23. A. outside B. top C. window D. inside
24. A. warm B. strong C. healthy D. tall
25. A. behave B. react C. conduct D. operate
26. A. Gas B. Sunlight C. Heat D. Energy
27. A. absorb B. use C. stop D. reflect
28. A. sky B. greenhouse C. atmosphere D. surface
29. A. disappears B. escapes C. continues D. remains
30. A. effect B. result C. change D. force
答案：
21. B。 本句话后面的“…by trapping heat from the sun.”可知这里是讲温室的工作原理，温室的工作原理是蓄留来自太阳的热量，所以选work。
22. C。 根据下一句“This causes the greenhouse to heat up…”可知，太阳光透进窗玻璃后，热量却被阻止散出，从而使温室内温度上升。escape有“(气体)逃出、逸出”的意思，符合语境。
23. D。 温室的原理就像停在阳光下的小汽车内部一样，阳光透进以后，热量不易散出。注意：因为类比的是the greenhouse的内部，所以对停在阳光下的小汽车来说就是指其内部了，而并非车窗。
24. A。 根据此句的关键词in winter可知选择A项，其他的选项干扰性较为强烈，但是如果是针对in winter这个特殊环境的话，选择A项是选择。温室内温度的升高可以使植物在冬天能保持温暖，促进生长。
25. A。 根据本段最后一句“Some of the energy passes back into space, but much of it 29, trapped in the atmosphere by the greenhouse gases, causing our world to heat up.”可知当阳光进入大气层后，有一部分热量将会被一些温室气体(大气中的二氧化碳、水气、甲烷、氮氧化物、臭氧等) trapped in the atmosphere，从而导致地球表面温度上升。这个原理与温室的原理是相同的。那么大气中这些能够trap一部分热量的温室气体的作用就很类似温室里窗玻璃的作用。所以此题选择A项behave比较合适。
26. B。 因为还没有被吸收，所以这里用太阳光比较合适，描述太阳光先进入地球的大气层……
27. A。 从其后的Once absorbed可得到暗示，太阳光穿过厚厚的一层温室气体后到达地球的表面，大地、水和生物圈都会吸收一部分太阳光的能量。
28. C。 地球吸收热量后，一些能量依旧返回大气层。从后面的一些到了太空中，一些被trapped in the atmosphere by greenhouse gases可以看出。
29. D。 remains保留下来。从后面的trapped in the atmosphere by greenhouse gases “一些被大气层中的温室气体蓄留”可知答案。
30. A。 根据其后内容可知是在谈温室效应的影响，从后面的“If the effect becomes stronger…”可以得到提示。
2语法填空
阅读下面短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空格处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的正确形式填空，并将答案填写在答题卡标号为31-40的相应位置上。
词数：138 完成时间：8分钟 难度：--
every student will be faced with the question when he passes the college entrance e-aminations: Should we choose a good major 31 a good university first? Some students prefer 32 (consider) majors first so that they can learn 33 they are interested in. It will also make 34 possible for them to take their favorite jobs in the future. 35 , those 36 think differently believe that the environment is important to one's development and 37 graduates from leading universities are often more likely to find a good job. 38 my opinion, the best choice is a good major at a good university. If we cannot obtain both, the first thing 39 (consider) is a good major, because no matter 40 we study, we can still achieve a lot in a certain field if we try our best.
31.or 32.to consider 33.what 34.it 35.However 36.who 37.that 38.In
39.to consider 40.where
31.or，表选择关系：
32.to consider，prefer to do sth.是固定结构，“更喜欢做……，宁愿做……”
33.what，考查由what引导的宾语从句：
34.it, 此处的it作形式宾语：
35.However。表意思的转折，“然而，可是”：
36.who，who引导定语从句：
37.that，由and连接的两个宾语从句，其中引导第二个宾语从句的that不能省掉。
38.In，in one's opinion是固定搭配，“依照/按照某人的观点”.
39.to consider, the first thing to do 表“要做的第一件事”，动词不定式to do作后置定语：
40.where，no matter where we study表“我们无论在哪里学习”：
3阅读理解
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出选项，并在答题卡上将该项涂黑。
词数：314 完成时间：7分钟 难度：---
In June, 2007, a group of students from eight high schools in Winnipeg, the capital of Canada’s Manitoba province, will begin test-launching (试发射) a satellite the size of a Rubik’s cube.
The one-kilogram Win-Cub satellite, named for its home city and its shape, will be put into low orbit. Once in space, it can perform for a few months or up to several years, communicating information that could help find the signs of earthquakes.
There are 80 similar satellite projects worldwide, but this is the first high-school based program of its kind in Canada. 30 Manitoba high school students are having a hand in designing and building the satellite, in cooperation with aerospace (航空航天的) e-perts and 10 students from the University of Manitoba, and with support from two other organizations.
The Win-Cube project is not something that goes on a piece of paper; it is real-world engineering, allowing high school students to have an opportunity to learn more about the e-citing world of engineering through their participation in this challenging program. It is also taken as a wonderful e-ample of the unique partnerships within Manitoba. Designing, building and launching a satellite with high-school participation will bring this world-class educational project into reality and Manitoba closer to space.
“These Manitoba high school students deserve congratulations for their enthusiasm, innovation (创新), and a strong love for discovery,” said Education, Citizenship and Youth Minister Peter Bjomson. “We want to make science more relevant, interesting and attractive to high school students by showing them how classroom studies can relate to practical e-perience in the workplace or, in this case, in space,” Bjomson added.
The Win-Cube program is mainly named at inspiring a strong desire for discovery on the part of the students. It also shows Manitoba’s devotion to research and innovation and the development of a skilled workforce—all important drivers of knowledge-based economic growth.
41. According to the passage, the Win-Cube satellite is .
A. named after Manitoba and its shape
B. intended for international communication
C. designed like a Rubik’s cube both in shape and size
d. challenged by university students around the world
42. According to Mr. Bjomson, .
A. those Manitoba high school students are worth praising
B. the study of space can be practically made in classrooms
C. Manitoba high schools are famous for the study of space
d. scientific research is too far away from high school students
43. The primary purpose of the project is to .
A. find the early signs of earthquakes
B. relate studies to practical
C. help high school students study real-world engineering
d. inspire a strong desire for discovery among the students
44. Which of the following statements is WRONG?
A. In Canada there are 80 similar satellite programs in all.
B. These students will have an opportunity to learn more about engineering through the project.
C. These high school will have a strong love for discovery and be interested in science.
d. This Win-Cube program is very successful in Canada.
45. The best title for this passage may be .
A. Manitoba School B. Win-Cube Program
C. Space Co-operation D. Satellite Launching
答案：
本文主要讲述了一群来自加拿大Manitoba省的高中学生在专家的帮助下成功发射了一枚叫Rubik’s Cube(魔方)的人造卫星，这枚卫星将用来帮助发现早期地震迹象，这样的活动有助于提高学生的能力，激励学生探索的欲望。
41. C 细节理解题。 答案在第一段。
42. A 细节理解题。他们成功发射了魔方这颗卫星，从倒数第二段第一句话可看出答案是A。
43. D 推理判断题。 写这些事情的目的，在于激励学生探索的欲望。
44. A 细节理解题。根据第三段第一句可知A项是错误的说法。
45. B 主旨大意题。 只有Win-Cube program才能全面表达这篇文章的大意。
4.读写任务
阅读下面一封信，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文：
dear editor,
I 'm writing to tell you about a food poisoning incident. Several days ago, my neighbor family ate a bag of fake food from the market. After the meal, they had stomachaches and brought up what they had eaten as their faces turned pale. Fortunately, another neighbor passed by only to find the accident and immediately called the ambulance, which carried them quickly to hospital. After several hours' treatment they finally escaped from death.
From this all of us have realized the importance of food safety. And I do hope the whole society shall begin taking actions to protect people's life safety.
Yours
li Hua
[写作内容]
你校是一所国际学校校办英文杂志的学生编辑：你看了上面这封信后，也想写一篇关于该信的感想或评论的文章，内容要点包括：
1、以约30个词概括上面这封信的内容要点，并作为你的文章的开头部分：
2、以约120个词谈谈你对文中叙述之事的感想和相关的情况，并包括下面要点：
1)你对此事件的看法：
2)解释你的理由并提出你的建议：
3)向受害者表达尽快复康的祝愿：
[写作要求]
1.作文中可使用自己的亲身经历或虚构的故事，也可以参照阅读材料的内容，但不得直接引用原文中的句子;标题自定：
2.作文中不能出现真实姓名和学校名称：
[评分标准]概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯：
[写作辅导]
1.写作有可能用到的主要短语和单词：获得利益make profits, 非法的illegal，卫生hygiene，安全措施safety measures，控告charge，和谐的harmonious,食品安全food safety.
2.本文的概要必须包含以下要点：I' m writing to tell you about a food poisoning incident. / Fortunately, another neighbor passed by only to find the accident and immediately called the ambulance, which carried them quickly to hospital / After several hours' treatment they finally escaped from death. / From this all of us have realized the importance of food safety.
3.本文要注意，概要一定要根据文段的时态来写。同时，绝对不能抄袭原文的句子：作文中“你对此事件的看法”、“解释你的理由并提出你的建议”“向受害者表达尽快复康的祝愿”为评论性文字和结论性的观点，故用一般现在时或一般将来时态。
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
答案:
Safety Ought to Be Paid More Attention to
Today, I received a reader's letter about a food poisoning incident, and with others' help, the victims were safe. The responsible reader also referred to the importance of food safety and the necessity of actions to protect people's life.
I was shocked at the food poisoning incident. Personally speaking, the government should pay more attention to the food safety and making some necessary laws. As some illegal businessmen are only interested in making profits in the race to become rich quickly, they seldom care about the necessary safety measures and hygiene or care what happens to consumers. They must be charged by law. Only in this way will the whole society have a better and harmonious life.
Here, I also wish all the victims recover soon.
英语选修6教案【篇7】
Unit 4 of Module 6 Language points
班级 姓名 学号 时间 评价
Learning Aims:
1. To learn some language points in this text to enlarge the vocabulary
2. To use the language points when doing the exercises.
Learning Important and Difficult Points:
1. Learn to analyze some long and complicated sentences.
Learning Methods:
1. Learn some phrases by heart.
2. Learn the usage of some words and phrases through self-study and practice.
Learning Procedures:
第一部分：自主探究
Ⅰ. 识记短语
1. feel honored 感到荣耀 2.be made up of 由……组成
3. human rights 人权 4. be based on 以……基础
5. be involved in 参与 6. in addition 此外
7. child labour 童工 8. with the help of 在……的帮助下
9. work on the projects 致力于项目 10. increase one’s awareness 提升意识
11.draw one’s attention 吸引某人的注意力 12. per day 每一天
13. add… to… 向……增加 14. under the umbrella of 在……的保护下
15. across the world 在全世界 16. lack of 缺少
17. agree to do 同意做某事 18. be available to 可得到的
19. look up 查阅 20. primary education 小学教育
21. meet goals 实现目标 22. worthy organizations可敬的组织
II. 重点单词、词组或句子用法探究
1.［原句回放］I am pleased to have this chance today to talk to you about the United Nations or the UN, as it is more often referred to. 句中as意为 _像，正如_，词性是__连词___ ，引导__方状_从句。refer to 意为 谈到__，其中to 是__介词__ （词性）；refer to还有_查阅___ ， __指的是___ 的意思。
［拓展］refer to … as 把……当作……；reference n. 提到，谈及；指的是；参考；查阅；reference book 参考书 小试牛刀
1)他喜欢科学，就像他父亲一样。(as)
___He likes science, as his father does.__________________________________________
2) This exam is vital because the score will be ______ by the school you apply to. (B级)
A. looked up B. referred to C. added to D. turned on
3) The book ______ by Mr. Wu is written by my English teacher.
A. referring to B. referred to C. referred D. to refer
2.［原句回放］The UN is an international group made up of countries that want to increase peace, and I’m very happy to have been chosen to be a Goodwill Ambassador for them. 句中made up of 意为 ___由…组成____ ， 作 __后置定语__（成分）。它的反义词组是 ____make up____， 该词组还有 __化妆____、__编造____、___弥补___ 等含义。to have been chosen 是动词不定式的 ___完成____ 时态， 表示动作 ______已经______ 发生。
［拓展］be made up of = consist of 由……组成 be made from/of 由……制成
be made into 被制成 小试牛刀！
1）我很荣幸被邀请参加你们的婚礼。
I feel honored to be invited to attend your wedding. __________________________________
2）所有动物身体都是由细胞构成的吗？。
Are all animals bodies made up of cells? _____________________________________
3）As we all know, the world is ______ seven continents and four oceans. (B级)
A. consisted of B. made in C. made out of D. made up of
4) Women ______ 40 per cent of the workforce. (C级)
A. make out B. make for C. make up D. make into
3.［原句回放］With the help of these armies and other worthy organizations the UN assists the victims of wars and disasters. 句中worthy是 __adj.___ （词性），作 定语____ （成分），意为 ___可敬的____ 。除此之外，worthy 还有 ___值得__ 的意思。assist 意为 帮助___ ，可构成词组 assist sb. _to do_/__with sth _/_in doing_____________。
［拓展］be worthy of +n be worthy of being done be worthy to be done be worth doing/n It is worthwhile to do/ doing 小试牛刀！
用worth，worthy和worthwhile 填空
1) The book he bought is worth_ 100 yuan.
2) His advice is worth considering/consideration.
3) I think the advice is worthy of being considered.
4) I think the city is worthy to be visited.
5) I think it is worthwhile to visit the city.
6) The problem is ______. Which is wrong?
A. worth paying attention to B. worthy to be paid attention to
C. worthy of being paid attention to D. worthy being paid attention to
7) The novel is ______ worth reading.
A. very B. so C. well D. much
4.［原句回放］Watch any TV report on places where there is a war, and you will see soldiers wearing blue berets. 该句是由一个 祈使句 + and + 陈述句 组成。Where there is a war 是一个 定语 从句， where 是 关系副词 (词性)。 see soldiers wearing blue berets中wearing blue berets 是 宾补 （成分）。小试牛刀！
努力学习，你会实现梦想的。
Work hard, and you will realize your dreams.______________________________________
快点，否则你就会迟到的。
Hurry up , or you will be late.____________________________________________________
1）Do more speaking, I think, ______ you’ll improve your spoken English.
A. then B. and C. so D. or
5.［原句回放］In addition, my visits will encourage people working on the projects and draw local people’s attention to the situation. 句中in addition意为 另外 ，在句中相当于besides，表示 递进_ 关系。working on the projects在句中充当 后置定语_（成分）。draw one’s attention to 意为 把注意力吸引到…… ， to 是 介词（词性），后接 n/v-ing/pron（词性）。
［拓展］attract/ call/ catch one’s attention 吸引某人注意力 pay one’s attention to 注意，留心 fix /focus one’s attention on 集中注意力于 小试牛刀！
1）Don’t let your students play computer games any more; you should ______ their attention to their study.
A. pay B. turn C. change D. draw （B级）
2）他招手以引起服务员的注意。
He waved to attract the attention of the waiter.
6.［原句回放］There are lots of such promgrammes and funds under the umbrella of the UN, and these have helped millions of people across the world. 句中under the umbrella of 意为在…的管理、保护下 。across the world 意为 在全世界 。
［拓展］ under the leadership of 在……的领导下， under the control of 受……控制， 在进行中 under way , 在建设中 under construction , 在修理中 under repair , 在讨论中 under discussion 。 小试牛刀！
1) The flowers grow well ______ the green house.
A. under the help of B. with the permission of
C. under the leadship of D. under the umbrella of
7.［原句回放］Apart from the urgent problems caused by wars and conflicts, the UN helps countries with other problems such as lack of education, lack of food, poverty, disasters and disease. 句中apart from 意为 除…之外 ，相当于besides（ besides/ except）。lack of 意为 缺乏 ， lack是n.（词性），另外lack 还有 vt.（vt./ vi.）。
［拓展］ be lack of 缺乏 no lack of 不缺乏 for the lack of 由于缺乏 be lacking in 缺乏 小试牛刀！
1）Though ______ money, his parents managed to send him to college （C级）
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked in
2） The exporer got a disease in blood for the ______ of fresh vegetable and fruit.
A. sake B. lack C. safe D. result （C级）
第二部分：达标测评
I. 根据要求将下列句子翻译成英文
1. 他很高兴被提供了一个出国的机会。(be happy to )
He is happy to have been offered a chance to go abroad.______________________________
2. 如果操作不当，机器就会很快坏掉。(operate )
If operated improperly, the machine will break down soon.____________________________
3. 除了恶劣的天气之外，我们还经常遇到野兽。(apart from )
Apart from the bad weather, we also meet with wild animals frequently.__________________
4. 缺水是这个地区最大的难题。(lack )
Lack of water is the biggest problem in this area.____________________________________
II. 单项填空
1. It is really dangerous. One more step ______ the baby will fall into the well.
A. or B. so C. but D. and
2. If the tickets are still ______ to us, I want to buy one.
A. able B. available C. acceptable D.enjoyable
3. Most of us know we should cut down on fat, but knowing such things isn’t much help when it ______ shopping and eating.
A.refers to B. speaks of C. focuses on D. comes to
4. He ______ so much work that he couldn’t really do it efficiently.
A. put on B. took on C. took in D. took over
5. Much attention should be paid to ______ people destroying the rain forest.
A. stop B. stopping C. keep D. keeping
6. Most people don’t realize the amount of effort that is _______ in writing.
A. involved B. involving C. contained D. called
7. ______ these arrangements, extra ambulances will be on duty until midnight.
A. In addition B. In addition to C. except D. what’s more
8. Health problems are closely connected with bad eating habits and a ______ of exercise.
A. limit B. lack C. need D. demand
英语选修6教案【篇8】
有的学生对小学英语比较重视，学得很好;但有的学生或学校不重视，学得很不好，还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错，但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此，整个班级的英语水平很不平衡，给日常教学带来诸多的不便，提高了难度。
学生刚刚从小学进入初中，处于一个衔接的阶段，学习任务加重，学习的习惯不是很好，没有形成一定的适合自己的方法，都有待改善。
总之，既要避免好生吃不饱的现象，又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去，激发他们的兴趣和信心，赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣，教给学生学习的方法，从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发，倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程，这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据，以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点，而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放， 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发，任何教学内容的调整或取舍，任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan);提倡教师结合学生实际，充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源，丰富教学内容，创造运用英语的机会，注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan);提倡任务型语言教学，教学进度整体把握，教学形式不拘一格;课堂以学生为主体，以任务为主线，重视体验参与，课后访谈调查，读写扎记，重视语言运用;正视个体差异，倡导过程激励，以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
高中英语教案(精品)
随着人类社会的不断发展，范文的用途越来越广，不同的文章可以用在不同的场合，你是否需要一些实用的范文呢？经过收集并整理，小编为你呈上高中英语教案(精品)，欢迎阅读，希望对你有帮助。
高中英语教案(精品)
作为一名高中英语教师，我们的教学目标是帮助学生掌握英语听、说、读、写等多方面的能力，并培养他们的跨文化交流能力。为了实现这一目标，我们需要设计精品的教案来引导学生有效学习。下面是一个高中英语教案的示范：
教学内容：Unit 2: Healthy Lifestyles
教学目标：
1. 培养学生的课文阅读能力，能够获取文本信息。
2. 提高学生使用英语进行口头交际能力。
3. 发展学生的写作技能，能够写一篇有关健康生活方式的文章。
4. 培养学生的团队合作和自学能力。
教学重点：
1. 重点阅读课文并获取信息。
2. 学习掌握相关词汇和短语。
3. 学习运用情态动词表达建议和禁止。
4. 学习写一篇关于健康生活方式的短文。
教学难点：
1. 如何正确理解课文并准确获取信息。
2. 如何正确运用情态动词表达建议和禁止。
3. 如何组织语言并写出一篇连贯的文章。
教学过程：
Step 1: Pre-reading
导入新课，利用图片和问题引导学生进入课题：“What do you think a healthy lifestyle means? How can we keep ourselves healthy?”
Step 2: Introducing new vocabulary
通过播放短视频、图片等方式引入新词汇并加强理解。帮助学生掌握并运用新词汇。
Step 3: Reading and comprehension
教师让学生阅读课文，并提问相关问题来检查学生对内容的理解。让学生找出课文中的关键信息，如作者给出的建议等。
Step 4: Listening and speaking
教师播放与课文相关的录音，并让学生用正确的语音、语调复述课文要点。然后，学生进行小组讨论，以增加学生之间的互动和语言输出。
Step 5: Grammar focus
教师讲解情态动词的用法，并通过例句进一步说明。然后，学生进行练习，利用情态动词写出建议和禁止。
Step 6: Writing task
教师引导学生写一篇关于健康生活方式的短文，要求学生使用所学的词汇、短语和句型。学生可以在小组内相互修改并提供反馈。
Step 7: Peer review and feedback
学生阅读彼此的作品并给予反馈，指出优点和改进之处。教师也给予学生写作方面的建议和指导。
Step 8: Consolidation and extension
教师与学生一起总结本节课的重点和难点，并提供一些拓展练习，帮助学生巩固所学内容。
总结：
通过上述教案的设计和实施，我们可以帮助学生全面掌握课文知识、提高交际能力和写作能力。同时，激发学生的学习兴趣，培养学生的团队合作和自学能力。这样的教学过程将使学生在英语学习中取得更好的成绩，并能将所学应用到现实生活中。